JP2020116087A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest of promotion performance promoting operation of performance operation means.SOLUTION: A game machine includes performance operation means (a performance button) which can be operated by a player and is composed of a plurality of components and performance control means (a performance control device) controlling performance of a game. The performance control means can execute promotion performance promoting operation of the performance operation means. The promotion performance comprises: assembly performance displaying a series of performance imitating the process that the performance operation means is completed by a plurality of members before an operation effective period of the performance operation means; and notification performance displaying a promotion image including an operation means image (a button image) imitating the performance operation means displayed as a result of the assembly performance during the operation effective period of the performance operation means and notifying that operation of the performance operation means can be received. By a performance mode of the assembly performance, prescribed information (for example, probability set value) can be suggested.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 50

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is given to a player when the result of the game is a special result.

A play operation that can be operated by a player in a game machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a predetermined special result. A gaming machine is known which includes a means and a display control means for controlling display on the display device, and the display control means is capable of displaying a promotion image for promoting the operation of the effect operation means on the display device during the game. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-172186, A

In the conventional gaming machine, it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the promotion effect in which the promotion image is displayed and the operation of the effect operation means is promoted.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of promotion production for promoting the operation of production operation means.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
In a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is given to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
Production operation means that can be operated by the player and is composed of a plurality of members,
And a production control means for controlling the production of the game,
The effect control means can execute a promotion effect that promotes the operation of the effect operation means,
The promotion production is
An assembly effect that displays a series of effects imitating the completion of the effect operation means by the plurality of members before the operation effective period of the effect operation means,
During the operation effective period of the effect operation means, it is possible to display an promotion image including an operation means image that is displayed as a result of the assembly effect and imitates the effect operation means, and accept an operation to the effect operation means. It consists of a notification effect to notify that,
It is characterized in that predetermined information can be suggested by the production mode of the assembly production.

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest of the promotion effect for promoting the operation of the effect operation means.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flow chart explaining winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining probability setting value change processing. It is a flow chart explaining probability set value confirmation processing. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure game process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flow chart explaining a special process starting port switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure normal process. (A) is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation start process, (b) is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure fluctuation process. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flow chart for explaining a general-purpose game process. It is a flow chart explaining ordinary processing usually. It is a flow chart explaining processing during general figure change. It is a flow chart explaining processing during public figure display. It is a flow chart explaining the processing during ordinary drawing. It is a flow chart explaining external information edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining external information edit processing. It is the flowchart which explains the main processing in the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart explaining reception command check processing. It is a flow chart explaining received command analysis processing. It is a figure explaining another example of setting of a probability set value. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the 1st modification. It is a flow chart explaining probability setting value change processing in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the fixed condition monitoring process in a 2nd modification. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flow chart explaining shift judgment processing in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the state of the switch corresponding to the probability set value in the 4th modification. It is a flow chart explaining probability setting value change processing in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining a schematic structure of a setting means and a game control device in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining a character appearance change. It is a figure explaining a character appearance change. It is a figure explaining a character appearance change. It is a figure explaining a character appearance change. It is a figure explaining a character appearance change. It is the figure which shows one example of the disassembled perspective view of the production button. It is a figure explaining operation promotion production. It is a figure explaining operation promotion production. It is a figure explaining operation promotion production. It is a figure explaining operation promotion production. It is a figure explaining operation promotion production. It is a figure explaining operation promotion production. It is a front view of the game board in the second embodiment. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the game board in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view explaining operation|movement of the upper movable decoration unit in 2nd Embodiment, Comprising: (a) The figure which shows the state which the 1st upper movable member operated, (b) The state which the 2nd upper movable member operated. FIG. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of the light emission decoration part in 2nd Embodiment, Comprising: (a) and (b) The figure which shows a covering state, (c) And (d) The figure which shows a retracted state. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the 1st upper movable member in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st upper movable member in a 2nd embodiment, and is a figure in which (a) a luminescent decoration part was omitted and (b) a luminescent decoration part. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a light emitting unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining an accessory assembly production. It is a figure explaining an accessory assembly production.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, on the front frame (main body frame) 12, the game board 3
A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of 0 is attached.

Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, a lamp, an LED and the like are built in, and decorations and effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification color of the lamp or the LED (for example, red). The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) and the speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b are used to notify the content of the abnormality by voice. A lamp for paying out anomaly may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (which supplies game balls to a hitting ball launching device (not shown)
Reservoir dish), the upper bowl ball outlet 22 from which the gaming balls dispensed from the dispensing unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 flow out, and the gaming balls dispensed when the upper dish 21 is full. A lower tray (reception tray) 23 for storing and an operation handle 24 of the hitting ball launching device are provided. Further, on the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21, an effect button 25 having an effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided near the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

In addition, to the right of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an eject button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. Balance display section (not shown) that displays the balance of the prepaid card
Etc. are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player turns the operation handle 24, the hitting ball launching device directs the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire. Further, by the player operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2 ), the effect of the player's operation intervening, etc. It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is a resin side case 3 provided at each of four corners of the game board 30.
3 and the guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game production structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 is disposed in the substantially center. Display device 41
Is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent the game balls from jumping in from the peripheral game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area where the image on the display screen can be displayed (display area), a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols) and information relating to the game such as a character that directs the special figure variable display game and a background image that enhances the effect are displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is played. Further, on the display screen, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed.
Further, on the left part and the right part of the center case 40, a board effect device 44 is provided which is a movable effect device for effecting a game including a special figure variation display game by operating movable effect members. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

Further, in the lower left part of the center case 40, a sub-display for displaying a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special figure variable display game separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device 41 and for displaying the number of starting memories An information display device 90 is provided.

The sub-information display device 90 is a first light emitting unit that forms a sub-game display unit that displays a fourth symbol that executes the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the first special figure variable display game. The second sub configured by the sub game display unit 91 and a single light emitting unit that forms a sub game display unit that displays the fourth symbol that executes the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the second special figure variable display game. And a game display unit 92. Further, the first special display variable display game which is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game by the two light emitting parts, and the second special figure variable display game which is the two light emitting parts are executed A second sub-display section 94 showing the number of second starting memories, which is the right to perform.

In the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92, a display indicating that the corresponding special figure variable display game is being variably displayed, and a display indicating the result are turned off, blinking, and turned on of the light emitting unit. Can be displayed. Further, the first sub-display unit 93 and the second sub-display unit 94 indicate the numbers of the first start memory (special figure 1 hold) and the second start memory (special figure 2 hold), respectively, to turn off the two light emitting parts, It can be displayed by blinking and lighting.

By providing the sub-information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the fourth symbol is displayed on the display device 4
By displaying the data in No. 1, it is possible to effectively use the display area without occupying the display area of the display device 41. The sub information display device 90 is provided outside the operation range of the board production device 44 so that the sub information display device 90 is not covered in the process of operating the board production device 44. ..

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol starting gate 34 (general figure starting gate, starting area, inflow area) that provides the starting conditions of the figure varying display game is provided. The game ball that won the universal figure starting gate 34 is a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
Detected by.
On the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, three general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the universal figure starting gate 34. The game balls that have won the general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) for providing a start condition of the first special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, directly below the starting winning opening 36, a normal variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) for providing the start condition of the second special figure variation display game is provided.
The normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which it falls toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. The movable member 37b is
It normally holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the game ball cannot flow. Then, when the result of the universal figure variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the universal sphere solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device is used to open the game ball easily into the regular variation winning device 37. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be allowed to win in the closed state, and in the closed state, the player may win the prize rather than the open state.
Further, below the normal variation winning device 37, an outlet 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize is provided.

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, a special variation that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is provided.
The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening/closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in the direction of falling toward the front side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. From the state where the special winning opening is closed (the blocking state which is disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (
It is converted to a state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variation winning device 38, for example,
Open/close door 38c driven by a special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device
Equipped with a special winning opening that can be opened and closed by a special winning or small hit game state, by converting the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state, it is easy for the game balls to flow into the big winning opening. Then, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. A special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the special winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. .. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two special winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening is detected by any of the special winning opening switches 38a. By thus providing a plurality of special winning opening switches 38a, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flown into the special winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game area 32 in which the game balls flow down, the area on the left side of the center case 40 is the left side game area, and the area on the right side of the center case 40 is the right side game area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the launching force and shoots a game ball to the left-side game area (so-called left hitting), so that the player can aim for winning at the starting winning opening 36 and shoot the game ball to the right-side game area (so-called). By hitting the right side, the universal figure starting gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 3
7 and the special variable winning device 38 can be aimed at.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is fired to the right game area. The played game sphere is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. The material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is such that the game balls passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 can be visually recognized from the outside. A game ball that passes through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball that flows down in the right-side game area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure changing display game, the second special figure changing display game, and the general figure starting gate 34, which are special figure changing display games, are displayed. A collective display device 50 for displaying a general-purpose variable display game triggered by winning and various information is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display section (special figure 1 indicator) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure variation display game including a 7-segment type display device (LED lamp) and the like. The second special figure fluctuation display section (special figure 2 display) 52 for the variable display game, the fluctuation display section (general figure display) 53 for the general figure variable display game composed of LED lamps, and the same LED lamp And a storage display unit 54, 55, 56 for informing the number of starting memories of each variable display game.
In addition, the collective display device 50, a first game state display unit (first game state display unit, right-handed notification unit) 57, which informs that a right-handed state is more advantageous than a left-handed state, a time saving When a state occurs, a second gaming state display section (second gaming state indicator, time saving state informing section) 58 that lights up to notify the occurrence of a time saving state, a probability state of jackpot when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on is a high probability state. A third game state display section (third game state display unit, probability state display section) 59 for displaying that
The round display unit 6 that displays the number of rounds (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning device 38) at the time of a big hit
0 is provided.
Note that the collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display device) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the occurrence of the big hit.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is displayed, for example, while the variation display game is being executed, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed on the display device 41. The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 msec, for example. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also driven to blink to change. It is configured to display that it is inside.
When the result of the game is “out”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of the off, and when the result of the game is “hit”, the off result mode (special result mode) is off. A game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, numbers or symbols) other than the result mode.

The public figure display 53 blinks a lamp during the change to indicate that the change is occurring, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the result of the game. Further, the universal figure holding indicator 56 displays the starting memory number (=holding number) of the universal figure starting gate 34, which is the variation start condition of the universal figure indicator 53, by turning off, blinking, and lighting a plurality of LEDs. Special Figure 1 Hold indicator 54
Is the number of unexploited balls (starting memory number=holding number) among the number of winning balls into the starting winning port 36, which is the condition for starting variation of the special map 1 display 51, by turning off, blinking, or turning on a plurality of LEDs. indicate. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the start memory number (=holding number) of the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37), which is the variation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52, turns off a plurality of LEDs. Display by blinking or lighting.

The first gaming state display unit (right hitting notification unit) 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and turns off the lamp when the left hitting is more advantageous for the player than the right hitting (normal hitting). If the player is in a game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting for the player (right hitting), the lamp is turned on.

The second gaming state display unit (time saving state notification unit) 58 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and in the normal gaming state in which the time saving state does not occur (when the variable time reduction function is not activated), the lamp is turned off. If a time saving condition has occurred (when the fluctuation time shortening function is activated), turn on the lamp.

The third gaming status display section (probability status display section) 59 is composed of an LED lamp and the like, and the gaming machine 1
When the probability state of the big hit is low when the power of 0 is turned on (normal probability state), the lamp is turned off, and when the probability state of the big hit is high probability state (probability change state) Turns the lamp on.

The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the special game state is not in effect, the lamp is turned off, and in the special game state, a lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result is displayed. Turn it on. The round display section may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in an integrated manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It comprises a CPU section 110 which has, an input section 120 which has an input port, an output section 130 which has an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 which connects the CPU section 110, the input section 120 and the output section 130, and the like. ..

The CPU section 110 is a game microcomputer (called amusement chip (IC))
CPU) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. DC32V, DC12V, D generated by the power supply device 400 are provided in the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as C5V is supplied to enable the operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC- that generates the DC voltage of DC 32V from an AC power supply of 24V.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter or a DC-DC converter for generating a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and a RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 are supplied with a power supply voltage at the time of power failure. Backup power supply unit 420 to supply
And, it has a power failure monitoring circuit, and is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 which generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal which inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is the game microcomputer 11 of the game control device 100.
1 (in particular, the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a backup storage means capable of holding the stored data even when the power is off. Then, when the power is restored, the control can be restarted based on the data held by the backup storage means. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Further, even when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point. The power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
An M (random access memory) 111C is provided.

The ROM 111B stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random number values at the time of game control. Used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as starting memory. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the special result mode, the game state is advantageous for the player (special game state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not derived and displayed yet,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform (so-called full rotation reach). Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game varies a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the left and right variable display areas, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, at the time when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the same Status that has become identification information,
However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this reach state.

Then, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving the special result mode is different (expected value is different), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and Premier reach are set. The expected value is no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <
It has become higher in order of premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared to the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the symbol of the big hit, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random pattern generation to generate random pattern random numbers for determining various reach and variable display game execution time in variable display without reach, etc. And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A executes the ROM 111B in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A causes the game result of the special figure variation display game (hit (
(Big hit or small hit) or out), probability state of the special figure variation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current game state (time saving) Based on the operating state), the number of starting memories, etc., one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Where the CPU
111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of a payout unit to drive a payout ball according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on a ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

In the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the universal starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is negative such as 7V. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 that receives a logic signal and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I/F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wires of the sensor and the proximity switch are illegally short-circuited, the sensor and the switch are disconnected from the connector, and the lead wires are cut to float. It is possible to detect an abnormal condition such as the occurrence of the abnormal condition and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The proximity I/F1
Among the outputs of 21, the detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

Further, the third input port 124 has a setting value change function that serves as detection means for detecting an operation in the operation unit for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which a probability value that gives a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned. Signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

The setting key switch 152 detects the operation of the setting key operation unit that is the first operation unit of the operation units. The setting key operation unit is provided with a key hole into which the setting key is inserted, and the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor capable of detecting that it has been turned to the second position, and is turned on when the setting key switch 152 is turned to the second position,
It is turned off when it is not turned to the position.

The set value change switch 151 detects an operation of a set value change button which is a second operation unit of the operation units. The set value change button is a push-type button, and the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the set value change button is pressed,
If it is not pressed, it is turned off.

By operating these operating parts, you can select the probability setting value to which the probability value that will be a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value can be played in the game. It is supposed to be used. Here, six probability setting values, setting 1 to setting 6, are prepared. The probability value assigned to each probability setting value is 1/320 in setting 1, 1/310 in setting 2, 1/300 in setting 3, 1/290 in setting 4, 1/28 in setting 5.
The value is 0, and the setting 6 is 1/270. This probability value is the probability value in the normal probability state,
The probability value in the high probability state is 10 times the probability value in the normal probability state.

When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position, and the power of the gaming machine is turned on to set the probability setting value. The probability setting value changeable state can be changed, and the probability setting value can be changed by pressing the setting value changing button in this probability setting value changing state. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

In addition, when the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operating unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 closed, or when the setting key of the setting key operating unit is turned on after turning on the power of the gaming machine. When turned to the second position, the probability setting value currently selected is changed to the probability setting value display device 153.
The probability setting value confirmation mode is displayed, but the probability setting value cannot be changed.

The probability setting value display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and the probability setting value is
It is designed to display with the number 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability setting value may be used. Further, other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or the probability set value may be indicated by the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, or the like. Alternatively, the probability setting value display device 153 may not be provided, and the probability setting value information may be displayed using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and accessory ratio.
In this case, while operating the probability setting value (probability setting value change state, probability setting value confirmation mode, etc.), the information of the probability setting value is displayed, and other than that, the calculated base value and role character ratio are displayed. Give priority to the display.

In the present embodiment, the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, and the probability setting value display device 15
3, etc. are provided in the game control device 100, and the game control device 100 selects a probability set value to which a probability value used for the lottery of the special figure variation display game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating the operation unit. It is supposed to be a setting means that enables it. The function of this setting means may be provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100. That is, setting means may be provided separately from the game control device 100. In this case, the operation signals of the set value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 may be input to the game control device 100 to change the probability set value in the game control device 100, or on the setting sub-board side. The probability setting value is changed and decided based on the operation of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152,
The determination result may be transmitted to the game control device 100.

Of the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is the main board 10
It is also designed to be supplied from 0 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
The detection signal of a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 as well as the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on a radio wave detected by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be accepted), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (Signal output when detecting that a predetermined amount of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full)), touch switch signal (input to the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24) Based signal), an out ball detection switch signal (a signal based on the detection by the out switch that detects all the game balls that have been shot in the game area 32 and finished playing), and the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided with a first input port 122.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is input to the ports 122, 123,
Not supplied to 124. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is set so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a game shop. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starter switch output from the proximity I/F 121, is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the test is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-shooting test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. At the port on the relay board 70, the game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-injection test apparatus.

The output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a special variable winning device 38 (a special winning opening solenoid) 38b and a movable member 37 of the normal variable winning device 37.
Second for outputting the opening/closing data of the solenoid (universal solenoid) 37c for opening b
An output port 134 is provided. The second output port 134 also outputs the display data of the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and accessory ratio.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. ON/OFF of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

In addition, the output unit 130 outputs information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, to the external information terminal board 7.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, for example. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting the display data of the probability setting value display device 153 displaying the selected probability setting value.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening/closing data signals of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the universal electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal, which is a first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The second driver 1 for outputting the ON/OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135
38b, a third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136, and is supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137. A fourth driver 138d for outputting an external information signal to be output to the external information terminal board 71 and a fifth driver 138e for receiving display data output from the second output port 134 and displaying it on the status display device 160 are provided. ..

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. The third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for pulling out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, and therefore the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs that are sequentially selected by, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board, but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 13
9, the gaming microcomputer 111 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, is an amusement chip (IC).
A main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , A sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sounds for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a, 19b
Equipped with.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and a storage content even if power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that is a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, lights a decorative lamp, and drives the motor. And drive control of solenoids, management of production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives a data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
From the main control microcomputer 311 to the main control microcomputer 311 to wait for reception of the interrupt signals INT0-n and the command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. The signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal INT is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I/F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 are changed to the effect control command signal (effect command). ) As. Gaming microcomputer 111 of gaming control device 100
Operates at 5V DC, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at 3.3V DC, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LED control circuit that drives and controls the board decoration device 46 and the sub information display device 90 that have LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40). 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the glass frame 15, a game board 30 (including the center case 40) Board production device 4 provided
A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control 4 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334, which drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc., are connected to the address/data bus 340.
It is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the. It should be noted that the glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a production device), and a movable production device that produces a game including a special figure variation display game by the movable production member that operates. A rendering device may be provided and a frame rendering movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame rendering device may be provided.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. For detecting the ON/OFF state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch), and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311;
A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the configuration as described above.
A DC voltage of 32V for driving a motor or a solenoid, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC 12V for driving a motor or an LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the same or the like. DC5 that is the power supply voltage for the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker. Furthermore, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as, DC 3.3V based on DC 5V
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating or DC1.2V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, And is supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, and the like to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game ball (from a launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32 (
A game is performed by hitting a pachinko ball). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The winning award 36, the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variation winning device 38 is won, or it flows into the outlet 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. And general winning a prize mouth 35
When a game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variation winning device 38, the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening is controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3). From the payout unit, the glass frame 15 is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23.

In the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided,
When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. CPU 11 of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100
In 1A, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the universal figure starting gate 34, if the universal figure starting memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), the universal figure starting memory number is set. The addition (+1) is performed and one ordinary figure starting memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of stored universal figure starting prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold indicator 56 of the collective display device 50. Further, in the universal figure starting memory, a random number value for hit determination (per random number value) for determining the result of the universal figure variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a figure start memory and the figure variation display game can be started, that is, when the figure variation display game is not being executed, the figure variation display game hits and the normal variation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If it is not the hit state, the hit determination random number value stored in the first-time normal figure starting memory stored is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine whether the general figure variation display game is out of contact. Then, the process of starting the universal figure variation display game is performed. When the random number for hit determination coincides with the determination value, the general figure variable display game becomes a win and a specific result mode (normal figure specification result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 presets a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns for a predetermined variation time on the public figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50 as a process of executing the general figure variable display game. After performing the universal figure changing display which is repeatedly displayed in the order, the process of displaying the universal figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.
In addition, the universal figure display 53 is configured by the display device 41, and, for example, numbers, symbols,
A character pattern or the like may be used, and after it is variably displayed for a predetermined time, it may be stopped and displayed to display the result.

When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, a lighting pattern that is one of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol that forms a special result mode on the universal figure display 53 according to the type of hit While displaying the stop, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is controlled to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the general-picture variation display game is off, control is performed to display the lighting pattern on the general-picture display 53 as a result mode of the off-going.

The winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first starting memory that is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 is a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).
In addition to storing up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), a second starting memory, which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning of the normal variation winning device 37, is stored. Based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first starting memory or the second starting memory. Then, the number of stored starting memories is displayed on the special figure 1 reserved display 54 and the special figure 2 reserved display 55 of the collective display device 50, and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Displayed as a display. Further, it is also displayed on the first sub display unit 91 and the second sub display unit 92 of the sub information display device 90.

When the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game is ready to start, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The generated big hit determination random number value is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B and set in accordance with the probability setting value, and the processing of determining the hit of the special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

When executing the first special figure variation display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display device 51 (variation display device) over a predetermined variation time. After performing the special figure 1 changing display, a process of displaying the first special figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result form) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. In the case of executing the second special figure variable display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display 52 (variable display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 2 changing display, a process of displaying the second special figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result form) corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information corresponding to the special figure variable display game on the display device 41 (variable display device) (for example,
A process for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game in which numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed. In addition, the sub game display unit of the sub information display device 90 displays the decorative special figure variation display game in which the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit is changed corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, setting of the effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

In the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variable display area (first special symbol),
In the right fluctuation display area (second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, after a predetermined time, the symbols that are changing are stopped in order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as the appearance of characters are performed in order to improve the interest.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, makes the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 a special result mode or a small hit result mode. While displaying the lighting pattern, processing for generating a special game state or a small hit game state is performed. Correspondingly, the result mode of the decoration special figure variable display game displayed on the display device 41 is also the special result mode or the small hit result mode.

In the process of generating a special game state or a small hit game state, C of the game control device 100
The PU 111A controls, for example, by opening the opening/closing door 38c of the special variation winning device 38 with the special winning opening solenoid 38b to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening. Then, until a condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is won in the special winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. 1 to open
It is set as a round, and control (cycle game) for continuing (repeating) this a predetermined number of times is performed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high-probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal-probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure Both floating display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, after the special game state is finished, the game state is a time saving state (specific game state, general figure high probability state, second operation state).
Can be generated. In this short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the universal figure fluctuation display game (general figure probability) is a high probability (general figure high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case of the normal variation winning device 37 being in the normal figure low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in this embodiment, the universal figure probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.
That is, the operation state of the normal variation winning device 37 is configured to be controlled in one of a first operation state and a second operation state in which winning is easier than in the first operation state. ..

In the time saving state, the execution time of the figure change display game (the figure change time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the figure stop time for displaying the result of the figure change display game is, for example, 6 msec.
It becomes 00 msec, and when the ordinary figure variation display game is a hit result and the ordinary variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal communication opening time) of the first hit stop symbol and the number of times of opening (for example, 500).
msec x 1 time), 2nd hit stop symbol opening time (normal electric opening time) and number of times of opening (for example, 17)
00msec x 2 times), 3rd hit stop symbol opening time (universal electric opening time) and opening count (eg,
1700 msec×3 times) can be set.

In addition, the execution time of the universal figure variation display game, the universal figure stop time, the number of regular electricity opening, and the universal electricity open time are appropriately set so that the general figure variation display game and the regular variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in a time saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, the execution time (
It is possible to control the normal figure variation time) to be the second variation time shorter than the first variation time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the universal figure stop time for displaying the result of the universal figure change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec is set). 704 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal figure variation display game is a winning result and the normal variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal electric open time) is set to the normal state (low probability state of general figure). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1
352 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of opening of a normal electric vehicle) is set to the first number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure changing display game.
It is possible to set the second number of times of opening more than that (for example, four times). Further, in the time saving state, the probability that the hit result of the figure variation display game (universal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability in the normal operation state (general figure low probability state, for example, 1/251). The probability (universal figure high probability state, for example, 250/251) can be used.

In the time saving state, the general variation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the universal figure fluctuation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication opening, the universal communication opening time, and the universal communication probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. The high-probability state and the short-time state can occur independently of each other, both of them can occur at the same time, or only one of them can occur.

The special display 1 display 51 and the special display 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special display variation display is performed independently or not simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use different display devices or different display areas for the first special figure variable display game and the second special figure variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. Further, the special machine 1 display 51 and the special machine 2 display 52 may not be provided in the gaming machine 10, and the special figure variable display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Also,
The second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when there is a starting memory of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game can be executed, the second special figure variation display game is It is designed to be executed (executed with priority). Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36
a, a starting opening 2 switch 37a, a gate switch 34a, a winning opening switch 35a, a big winning opening switch 38a, an out switch for detecting all the game balls that have been launched into the game area 32 A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used for detecting a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches a coil for magnetic detection. There is. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, first, the process of prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area where the value of the register or the like is saved when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and a predetermined register (
For example, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in the D register) (step S4)
.. In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order, and the leading 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal to stop firing is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the firing, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6),
A process for setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (RAM area or register or the like that is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). This makes it possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated because it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area when calculating the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area.

The third input port 124 has a set value changing switch 151 and a setting key switch 1
The signal from the switch 52 and the signal from the main frame opening detection switch are input, and by reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the set value change switch 151 at power-on The state of the setting key switch 152 and the open state of the front frame 12 (main frame) can be grasped. As described above, when the front frame 12 is opened and the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed Becomes In addition, when the power is turned on with the setting value change button pressed down without setting the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position, the RAM
The 111C is cleared (initialized).

By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, it is possible to reliably detect the operation of the set value change button. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the lapse of the waiting time, it is necessary to continue to operate the set value changing button from the time when the power is turned on until the lapse of the waiting time. However, by reading the state before the start of the waiting time, it is not necessary to perform such a troublesome operation, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization operation performed at power-on cannot be accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed.
First, the number of times (for example, twice) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). When the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (step S10;
N) returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. in this way,
By determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the power failure due to noise, etc. ..

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0. Is determined (step S12). If the timer value is not 0 (step S
12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the timer value is 0 (step S
12; Y), that is, when the waiting time is over, access to the read/write RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13), and off data is output to all output ports (output). Is set) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S16), and if normal (step S16; Y).
, The value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal, the power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h
) Is determined (step S17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), checksum calculation processing for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and the calculated checksum and power off It is determined whether the checksums of the two match (step S19). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a validity determination means for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on. If the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether the probability setting value change state is set (step S2).
1). When the probability setting value is being changed, it is possible to determine because the probability setting value changing flag is set.

If it is in the probability setting value changing state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the process of initializing the RAM and the probability setting value changing state in which the probability setting value can be changed are performed. The probability setting value is determined to be being changed when the power is shut off and the RAM data is normally backed up while the probability setting value is being changed. In this case, the probability setting value is set again. The value is changed. If the probability setting value change state is not set (step S21; N), the state of the previously read third input port 124 is changed to the body frame (
It is determined whether the front frame 12) is in the open state (step S22).

In the storage area of the RAM 111C, a probability setting value area, an initial value random number area, a variation pattern random number area, a game control area, and a status display area are set in order from the beginning. In the area for the probability setting value, a probability setting value area for storing information on the currently set probability setting value and a work area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability setting value are set. To be done. This work area includes a work probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value changing state and an area for storing various flags. In the area for initial value random numbers, big hit symbol initial value random numbers, small hit symbol initial value random numbers, hit initial value random numbers, and hit symbol initial value random numbers that are updated at any time are stored. In addition, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 which are updated at any time are stored in the fluctuation pattern random number area. Further, a work area in which information (various data and programs) necessary for performing game control is stored and a stack area are set in the game control area. In addition, a work area for storing information necessary for displaying a base value, an accessory ratio, and the like, and a stack area are set in the work area for status display.

The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot in the game area 32 and finished playing, and the number of payouts based on winning in the prize area. The information required to display the base value includes, for example, information about the number of game balls detected by the out switch and information about the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. In addition, the ratio of the accessory is the jackpot state (that is, the fanfare and the ending) out of the total number of award balls (the total number of award balls) obtained by winning the prize hole from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by each character) obtained by winning the special winning opening (excluding the inside) (so-called continuous character ratio), and the information necessary to display the character ratio. Includes, for example, information on the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and information on the number of prize balls (acquired ball number for each accessory).

The RAM clear start address 2 is the start address of the area for the initial value random number, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the The area for game control will be cleared. The area for the initial value random number and the area for the variable pattern random number may not be included in the clear target. Further, a RAM clear start address 1 which will be described later is the start address of the area for the probability setting value, and the RAM is cleared while the address is set to perform the area for the probability setting value and the initial value random number. The area for use, the area for random pattern random numbers, and the area for game control (work area and stack area) will be cleared. Further, a RAM clear top address 3 which will be described later is the top address of the area for game control, and RA is set with this address set.
By performing the process of clearing M, the area for game control will be cleared.

The status display area is initialized if it is abnormal by judging the validity in the status display edit output processing in the timer interrupt processing described later, but the backed up information is not normal. In the process of clearing the RAM with the RAM clear start address 1 set in this case, the state display area may be initialized. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM when the RAM clear start address 1 is set, all areas of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

In the checksum calculation process of step S18 and step S57 described later, the checksum is calculated only for the work area for game control. Note that one or more of the probability setting value region, the initial value random number region, the variation pattern random number region, the game control region, and the state display region may be targeted. When multiple areas are targeted, the checksum of each area may be calculated individually and the correctness may be determined individually, or the checksums of the areas may be summed to determine the correctness. You may make it judge collectively.

If the body frame is in the open state (step S22; Y), it is determined from the previously read state of the third input port 124 whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S23).
). If the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S23; Y), step S35
Then, the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state are performed. If the setting key switch is not in the on state (step S23; N),
If the main body frame is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24, and it is determined from the previously read state of the third input port 124 whether the set value change switch is in the on state (step S24). To do.

If the setting value change switch is not in the ON state (step S24; N), step S30
Move to and perform processing when the power is restored normally. If the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41, and the initial value random number area, the variation pattern random number area, and the game control RAM area are initialized. Perform processing. That is, the setting value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 stores data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Forms an initialization means for initializing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal check data (step S
16;N or step S17;N), if it is determined that the checksums do not match (
In step S19; N), the process proceeds to step S25, and initialization processing of all RAM areas is performed. That is, the probability setting value RAM area and the status display RAM area are initialized only when a RAM abnormality occurs. Further, the area for initial value random number, the area for variable pattern random number, and the RAM area for game control are not only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when a RAM abnormality occurs. Is also initialized.

First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (step S25), and the previously read third address is set.
From the state of the input port 124, it is determined whether the body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S26). When the main body frame is in the open state (step S26; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 previously read whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S27). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state are performed. As will be described later, the RAM is initialized in steps S35 and S36. In this case, since the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the probability setting value area and the initial value random number The area, the variation pattern random number area, and the game control area (work area and stack area) are cleared and the initial values are saved. The area for displaying the status may be initialized here.

If the setting key switch is not on (step S27; N) or the body frame is not open (step S26; N), a command (specific information) for setting change is issued to the effect control board (effect control device). 300) (step S28), RAM access is prohibited (step S29), control is stopped, and power-off of the gaming machine is awaited. Performance control device 30
At 0, the display of the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, and the speaker 19a are received based on the reception of the command of the setting change instruction. , 19b to output a voice or the like to notify that the probability setting value should be changed. This notification is continued until the power of the gaming machine is shut down.

In this case, if the front frame 12 is opened after turning off the power of the gaming machine and the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position and the power is turned on again, the setting key is processed in step S27. It is determined that the switch is on (step S27; Y), and step S35.
Then, the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state are performed. When the control is stopped by shifting to step S29, the front frame 12 is not opened or the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not turned to the second position after the power of the gaming machine is cut off. When the power is turned on again, the data in the RAM remains abnormal and the state cannot be changed to the probability set value changing state, so that the processes in steps S28 and S29 are performed again.

Although the notification is made by transmitting the setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 in step S28, the game control device 100 may make the notification. For example, the notification may be performed on the collective display device 50 controlled by the game control device 100, and a display that is not used as identification information is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. Alternatively, a display device may be provided for notifying the abnormality.

In step S30 of FIG. 6 as a process when the power is restored normally, the initial value at the time of power restoration is saved in the area to be initialized (step S30). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal is not finalized. Indefinite. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not fixed. After that, the area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state (step S31).

Here, when the probability of the special figure is not high (step S31; N), steps S32 and S3.
Skip 3 and move to step S34. If the probability of the special figure is high (step S31; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 is set. The ON (lighting) data of is saved in the segment area (step S33).

Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S34), and step S45. Go to. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S34, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the screen designation. A plurality of commands such as a command (for example, a customer waiting demo command when in the customer waiting state, a restoration screen command in other cases) is transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability setting value information that is the information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability setting value is performed, and the effect of the game is changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests or notifies the probability setting value, such as changing the selection probability.

The screen designation command transmits a command according to the restarted game state. When restarting the special figure variation display game interrupted due to power shutdown accompanying the restart of control, a recovery screen command forming recovery information is transmitted as a screen designation command. Further, in this case, information regarding the result of the restarted special figure variation display game is also transmitted. Further, when the power is cut off in the customer waiting state and the control is restarted in the customer waiting state due to the restoration of the power supply, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted as the screen designation command. Further, in the case of restarting the special game state that was interrupted due to the power interruption with the restart of the control, the special game state restart command is transmitted as the screen designation command.

Further, in step S35 of FIG. 6, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 as the processing of initializing the RAM and the processing of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state (step S
35), the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S36).
Here, when the backed up information is normal and the process shifts from step S21 or S23, since the RAM clear start address 2 is set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the game control The RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. That is, the probability setting value area and the status display area are not initialized. However, it is not necessary to clear the area for initial value random numbers and the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers.

On the other hand, if the backed up information is abnormal and the process moves from step S27, RA
Since M clear start address 1 is set, the area for probability setting value, the area for initial value random number, the area for random pattern random number and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and initialized. The value is saved. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization unit that can initialize the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting key operation unit). The area for displaying the status may be initialized here.

The area to be initialized is an area in which a value other than 0 is desired to be set in the area cleared to 0, and is, for example, a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. When all the RAM areas are cleared to 0, the probability setting value becomes setting 1 by setting 0 in the probability setting value area. By setting the probability setting value with the lowest probability,
Even if the RAM is cleared due to an abnormality or a fraudulent act, damage to the amusement store can be minimized. If a value other than 0 is set as the initial value, a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) can be set when the entire RAM area is initialized.

After that, the probability setting value changing flag is set as a process of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state (step S37). As a result, the probability set value is changed. Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S38). As a result, it becomes possible to display information on the probability setting value currently set on the probability setting value display device 153.

Then, the value of the probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the work probability setting value area (step S39), and the command during the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S40). , And proceeds to step S45. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90 is displayed based on the reception of the command during the probability setting change,
LED light emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operation of the board production device 44, speaker 19
A notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is given by outputting a voice by a or 19b. Although the RAM is initialized, the command for RAM initialization is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 here. Also, settings for outputting a security signal are performed. In this case, a timer may be set so that the security signal is output for a predetermined time, or the security signal may be output continuously during the period in which the probability setting value is changed. Further, since the RAM has not been initialized here, the setting for outputting the security signal may be omitted.

Further, in step S41 of FIG. 6, RA is executed as the initialization processing of the RAM area for game control.
The M clear start address 2 is set (step S41), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S43). As a result, the initial value random number area, the variable pattern random number area, and the game control RAM area (work area and stack area) are cleared to 0, and the initial value is saved. Also, the timer for outputting the security signal is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization unit capable of initializing the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the set value change button).

Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S44), and the process proceeds to step S45. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S44,
Model designation command, special figure 1 hold number command, special figure 2 hold number command, probability information command,
Probability setting value information which is information on the selected probability setting value, a RAM initialization command (to display a customer waiting demo screen and to notify the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) Multiple commands). Also, depending on the model,
In addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability setting value information that is the information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability setting value is performed, and the effect of the game is changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests or notifies the probability setting value, such as changing the selection probability.

In step S45, a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator)
Perform the process to activate the circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S45, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S46). Specifically, the CPU 111 sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Performed by A. Also, a bit transposed pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, the user may arbitrarily set it.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on
The value of is extracted, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining the hit symbol of the special figure (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random numbers for determining the hit of the general figure (hit random number) ), after saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of a random number (a winning symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the universal symbol (step S47), the interruption is permitted (step S48).
Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Then, an initial value random number updating process (step S49) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number updating process, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number are updated (for example, +1 update). Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special figure variation display It is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop pattern of the game. Also, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the universal figure variation display game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the hit stop symbol of the universal figure variation display game. Is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines. In this way, the randomness of random numbers can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process. Incidentally, the small hit random number does not naturally exist in the model without the small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there is also a gaming machine in which there is no winning symbol initial value random number.

In addition, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. Is configured. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are processed by the program. This is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the unit of the timer interrupt processing. Also, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, the so-called "initial value changing method" that changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random-type update in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number updating process in step S49, the number of times (for example, twice) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read through the port and the data bus and checked.
Is set (step S50), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S5).
1). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S51; N), the initial value random number updating process (
It returns to step S49). That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S48) before the initial value random number updating process (step S49), when a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process in step S49 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process as well. In order to prevent the value random number update process from being executed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update the interrupt to cancel the interrupt. There is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number updating process when the initial value random number updating process is not performed in the timer interrupt process and only in the main process.
This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52).
.. Then, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S5)
2; N) returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51). Further, if the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily interrupting (step S53).
), a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step S54) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S55
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S56).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S57) for calculating the checksum when the RWM is powered off and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S58), the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step S59), the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. ), and the main control means delays the start of the main control means when the power is turned on, and sets a predetermined waiting time for waiting for the start of the slave control device (game control device 100), and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.

In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100), RAM111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (setting value change button, setting key operation unit) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization unit (game) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. The control device 100) and the operation state of the initialization means are read before the start of the waiting time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

In the above main process, after performing the process of step S28, the process of step S26 is performed.
The process returns to step S26 to S2 until the setting key switch is turned on.
The process of 8 may be repeated. That is, the game control may be stopped to wait until the setting key switch is turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made based on the current state of the third input port 124 instead of the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6. Further, step S2
When the state of repeatedly performing the processing of 6 to S28 continues for a certain period of time, step S2
You may make it shift to 9 and wait for interruption of a power supply.

Further, here, the condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is that the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state and the setting key switch is in the on state.
The open state of the front frame 12 may not be a condition. Further, both the opening of the front frame 12 and the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition, or only the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition.

Alternatively, the setting key switch may not be provided, and the probability setting value changing state may be set only when the setting value changing switch is in the ON state. That is, steps S22 and S
If the set value changing switch is in the ON state in step S24 (step S24; Y) without performing the process of step 23, the process may proceed to step S35 of FIG. In this case, the processing of steps S41 to S44 of FIG. 6 for initializing the initial value random number area, the variable pattern random number area, and the game control area is not performed, but the setting is changed in the probability setting value changing state. It is possible to initialize only the initial value random number area, the variation pattern random number area, and the game control area by ending without setting or setting the same probability setting value and ending. In this way, if the setting value changing switch is switched to the probability setting value changing state only when the switch is in the ON state, the configuration of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be used.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player The control unit (game control device 100) for controlling, and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152),
A setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating a set value change button (set value change switch 151)), and the control means stores the stored contents even in a power-off state. A storage unit (RAM 111C) that can be held and a validity determination unit (game control device 10) that determines whether the information stored in the storage unit when the power is turned on is valid.
0) and an initialization unit (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage unit based on the operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability setting value, and stored in the storage unit by the validity determination unit. If it is determined that the stored information is not valid, the notification that prompts the selection of the probability setting value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the return to the normal state. Also, R
When the AM 111C is initialized, the probability setting value information set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set, but by informing the selection of the probability setting value, the game is initialized. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value that is not intended by the store from being left set.

Further, the control means is configured such that the probability setting value can be selected when the operation section is operated when the power is turned on, and the information stored in the storage means is stored by the validity determination means. If it is determined that the probability setting value is not valid, the notification for prompting the selection of the probability setting value is continued until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the probability setting value which is not intended by the game store from being left set by the initialization.

Further, the control means stops the control of the game and waits for the selection of the probability setting value when the validity determining means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the probability setting value which is not intended by the game store from being left set by the initialization.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect based on the information from the game control means, the game control means, When it is determined by the validity determination means that the information stored in the storage means is not valid, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means to stop the game control, and the effect control means determines the specific information. This means that the notification for prompting the selection of the probability setting value is performed based on the reception of the. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the probability setting value which is not intended by the game store from being left set by the initialization.

Further, the effect control means, when receiving the specific information, continues the notification prompting the selection of the probability setting value until the power is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the probability setting value which is not intended by the game store from being left set by the initialization.

In addition, a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are the first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation unit (setting value). And a setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a change button (setting value change switch 151)), and the control means
A storage unit (RAM111C) capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is cut off is provided, and when the first operation unit and the second operation unit are not operated when the power is turned on, based on the information stored and held in the storage unit. When the power is turned on and the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, the changeable state is set so that the probability setting value can be changed by the setting means, and only the second operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. If so, it means that the storage means is initialized. Therefore, the work of changing the probability setting value and the work of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency at the game shop can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide an operation section more than necessary, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation section can be reduced.

Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit in the changeable state. Therefore, it is possible to perform the operation of selecting the probability setting value and the operation of selecting the initialization using the same operation unit, and it is possible to improve the work efficiency in the game store. Further, it is not necessary to provide an operation section more than necessary, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation section can be reduced.

In addition, the control means includes a validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and the validity determination means stores it in the storage means. When it is determined that the stored information is not valid and the first operation unit is not operated, the notification that prompts the initialization of the storage unit is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the return to the normal state.

Further, the control means is configured to change the probability setting value by the setting means when the first operation section is operated when the power is turned on and to initialize the storage means. If the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid and the first operation portion is not operated, the first operation portion is operated. This means that a notification prompting the power to be turned on is given. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the return to the normal state.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the timer interrupt process is
The periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is the CPU 1
It is started by being input to 11A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 7 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S1).
01). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing the register saving process of moving the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (special winning opening solenoid 38b, universal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the game control device, and the second signal indicating the state of launch permission seen from the payout control device (the launch permission signal) is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the firing control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both of them are allowed to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, a random number update process 1 (step S10) for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that is the target of the initial value random number update process.
5), random number update processing 2 (step S106) for updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIGS. After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the universal gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 3
5a, special winning opening switch/status monitoring processing for monitoring whether or not a normal signal is input from the special winning opening switch 38a and for monitoring an error (whether the front frame or the glass frame is not opened, etc.) (step S107) is performed.

Next, a probability setting value changing process (step S1) for performing a process related to changing or confirming the probability setting value.
08) is performed, and it is determined whether the probability setting value change state is set (step S109). When the probability setting value is being changed, it is possible to determine because the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value change state is not set (step S109; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S110). The probability set value confirmation mode is a state in which the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

When it is not the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; N), as a process related to the progress of the game, a payout command transmission process (step S111) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, Special figure game processing (step S112) that performs processing relating to the figure variation display game, and general figure game processing (step S113) that performs processing relating to the figure variation display game are performed. On the other hand, when the probability setting value is changed (step S
109; Y) or in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process shifts to step S114 without performing the above-mentioned processing relating to the game. That is, in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot be progressed.

In the probability setting value changing state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the payout command transmitting process (step S111), the special figure game process (step S112), and the general figure game process (step S113) are not performed. However, it may be performed for one or more of these. For example, the payout command transmission process (step S111) may be performed so that the prize balls are paid out. Further, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing that is not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. For example, in the probability setting value change state, the random number update process 1 (step S105) and the random number update process 2 (step S10).
6) may not be performed and the random number may not be updated in the probability setting value changing state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. Further, the types of processing that are not executed in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode may be different.

Next, a segment LED edit process (step S114) for driving the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying the special figure variation display game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents, the magnetic sensor 61. Magnet irregularity monitoring processing (step S115) for checking the detection signal from the board to determine whether there is an abnormality, and board radio wave irregularity for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality Monitoring process (step S1
16) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S117) of setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch and the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. A state display edit output process is performed to calculate (step S118), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt return. At this time (at the end of timer interrupt processing), it is automatically performed. Depending on the CPU to be used, there is also a gaming machine in which it is necessary to instruct execution of a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, in the output process, first, OFF data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S141). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the universal electric solenoid 37c are combined and output (step S142).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S143), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated.
The output data of the digit line is acquired (step S144). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S145), and the combined data (for example, "door/frame open" data, "security signal" data) is output to a digit/external information output port. 136
(Step S146).

Then, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S147), and the loaded data is output to the segment output output port 135 (step S148). As a result, the plurality of light emitting display units provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step S149), and the combined data (
For example, the data of "big hit signal 1", the data of "big hit signal 2", the data of "big hit signal 3", the data of "big hit signal 4", the data of "symbol confirmation frequency signal", the data of "starting mouth signal" , "Main prize ball signal data" and the output data of the launch permission are combined (step S1).
50), the combined data is output to the output port 137 for outputting external information/launch permission signal (step S151).

Next, the OFF output data of the probability setting value display is set as the display content on the probability setting value display device 153 (step S152), and it is determined whether the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153). The probability setting value display permission flag indicates the probability setting value display device 15.
This is a flag that is set when the display regarding the probability setting value is permitted in 3.

When the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153; Y),
The probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (step S154),
The display data is output to the probability setting value display output port 134 (step S155). As a result, the probability setting value display device 153 displays the probability setting value. On the other hand, if the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (step S153; N), the display data is output to the output port 134 for displaying the probability setting value (step S155). In this case, the off output data set in step S152 is set, and the probability set value display device 15
Nothing is displayed in 3.

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S156). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S157).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. Yes (step S158). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S159). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S160).

Next, the test signal output data of the probability set value is loaded (step S161). Here, the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area as test signal output data. That is, the data for display of the probability setting value display device 153 is used as it is for the information regarding the probability setting value in the test signal to the test/trial shooting device. This simplifies the process and allows the output of accurate information without changing the information of the probability setting value. Of course, the display data may be converted into value information and output.

Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S162), and if it is not in the on state (step S162; N), the process proceeds to step S184. If it is in the ON state (step S162; Y), the loaded data and the setting key switch ON information are combined (step S163), and the process proceeds to step S184. Then, the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 6 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus (step S164), and the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The number-of-wins counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on a prize ball command.

The number-of-wins counter area 2 is for transmitting a main award ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of award balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning the prize is reached to a predetermined number (here, 10). In the area to be used, winning data corresponding to the prize balls for which the main prize ball signal has not been generated is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 constitutes a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output from the payout control device 200 to the external device each time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). And by comparing these two signals,
It is possible to monitor unauthorized payouts.

In each of these prize number counter areas, there is a prize number counter area for each number of prize balls set for each prize hole (in the present embodiment, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Is provided, and the count number of the corresponding prize number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The prize number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the prize number counter area 2 so that more prize data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, so that more untransmitted This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the three award ball counter areas of the winning number counter area 1, 10
Up to 65535 prizes can be stored in the individual prize ball counter area and the 14 prize ball counter area, respectively, and the three prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize prize of the prize number counter area 2 can be stored. The ball counter area is configured to store up to 255 prizes.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the number-of-wins counter area 2 (step S181), “0” is set in the number-of-wins counter area to be checked, out of the plurality of number-of-wins counter areas provided for each number of prize balls. Determine whether there is a count number that is not. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas have been checked. The determination is made (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. on the other hand,
If it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step S183; N), step S
Returning to step 181, the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count (step S181; Y), the count of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184).
, Obtains the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S18).
5). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S187). As the value of the remaining award ball area before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main award ball signal is stored.

Then, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 (step S189; N), the step S
The processing moves to 192. If it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the number of remaining prize balls reaches 10, the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls (step S191), and step S18
Return to the process of 8. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information about the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of the game balls to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of the game balls is concentrated during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, and the exact result of the big hit occurs. It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of special prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processing of steps S181 to S191 is processing of updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the processing of steps S192 to S201 is processing of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S1).
93). When the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. When the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. If the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control, the payout busy signal indicates an on state (busy state). To be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal is a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

When the payout busy signal is busy (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out the prize ball. If it is in a state, it is configured to send a payout command. As described above, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. We are trying to prevent this and reduce the burden of control.

Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy state) are, for example, during payout operation, during ball lending operation, during shot ball out error, overflow error, during frame radio wave illegal occurrence, payout ball detection switch (paid ball). The number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 (the number of award balls not paid out = the number of remaining game balls remaining) ) (When not equal to 0), etc.

When the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). Prize counter area 1
In the process of checking whether there is a count in step S195 (step S195), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls, there is a count number other than "0" in the prize number counter area to be checked. Determine whether.

Then, if there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196) to check whether the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas have been checked. The determination is made (step S197). With this judgment,
When it is determined that all the checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count (step S195; Y), the count in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198).
, The payout number command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step S199). Then, the obtained payout number command is written into the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 msec, for example, is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) indicating whether the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. In this case, the prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means is formed.

In this way, the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the prize is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not yet been paid out will be held in the game control device 100 side, and will be backed up in the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and will be backed up in the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without the function for performing.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, in conventional gaming machines, a function for backing up is required,
There was a problem that it would lead to higher costs. According to the present invention, it is possible to realize accurate payout control without providing the payout control device 200 with a function for backing up.

Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, it is possible to output the main prize ball signal without delay, and the external device such as the hall computer does not pay the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, and for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since a prize ball command counter capable of storing information about the prize ball command and a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

From the above, while performing the game control in a centralized manner, the winning area provided in the gaming area 32 (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variation winning device 38)
Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball to the payout control means for performing payout control of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. (Payout control device 200), and the game control means is based on a state signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means, which is output from the payout control means, can start payout control. When the control for transmitting the command to the payout control means is performed and the power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means, immediately. The prize ball command is paid out in response to the fact that the status signal indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control is continuously output for a predetermined period without transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means. This means that it is transmitted to the control means.

In addition, in the game area 32, winning areas having different numbers of prize balls (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 3
7, general winning opening 35, special variation winning device 38) are provided, and the game control means (game controlling device 100) has not transmitted a prize ball command for instructing the payout control of the game ball for each number of prize balls. Is provided with a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying, a state signal indicates that payout control can be started, and when each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the status signal determines whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control to each prize ball command counter. This means that the determination is made before determining whether or not there is a prize ball command.

In addition, the game is controlled in a centralized manner, and a prize ball command is issued based on a prize of a game ball to a predetermined prize area (starting prize hole 36, normal variable prize device 37, general prize hole 35, special variable prize device 38). And a payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing payout control of the game balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means.
The game control means is provided with a state signal output from the payout control means, which indicates whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control, when the payout ball can be started. A prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting a command to the payout control means, and a prize ball signal (main which includes information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of the game balls in a predetermined winning area) (main External information output means (game control device 100) for outputting a prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine
And the external information output means outputs the prize ball signal regardless of whether the state signal output from the payout control means can start the payout control. Becomes

In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives the prize ball command even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started in the event of a power failure and recovery from the power failure. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200) and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started in response to the award ball command corresponding to the state continuing for a predetermined period. This means that the information is sent to the payout control means.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100), the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information on the prize ball command, and the prize capable of storing information on the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). With a ball signal counter (game control device 100), the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) has a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variation). The prize ball command is generated in units of one prize, and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, the one prize ball command is issued to the payout control means (
It is configured to transmit to the payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 10
0) is capable of storing information of the prize in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area, updating when a game ball is prized in the predetermined prize area, and issuing a prize ball command to the payout control means. The number of award ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored by updating in response to the transmission to the external information output means, and the payout is determined in accordance with the award of the game ball to the predetermined winning area. The prize ball signal counter is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls and output a prize ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine each time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is a unit of one prize in a predetermined prize area. It is possible to store the information of the prize and update it at the time of winning the game sphere in a predetermined prize area, and at the same time, perform the update corresponding to the process of accumulating the number of prize balls by the external information output means. It is possible to memorize the number of prize balls that have not been played.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal each time the planned number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs the number of game balls to be paid out to 1
A main prize ball signal is output every time the number of balls becomes zero.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the main prize ball number signal output count by +1 for every 10 payout schedules (each time a payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in the payout command transmission process).
Then, the main prize ball signal is output for the updated (set) number of outputs.
With respect to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 coins are actually paid out, so that the schedule and the result can be matched. It is possible to deal with illegal payouts. In addition, even if you win during the big hit period, even if the payout is delayed due to running out of balls, etc. and the payout is made after the big hit ends, the hall prize (hall computer) will be Information can be collected (judged).

[Winning prize switch/Status monitoring processing]
FIG. 10 shows a winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S1) in the timer interrupt process.
07). In the winning opening switch/state monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value change state is set (step S299). When the probability setting value is being changed, it is possible to determine because the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value change state is not set (step S299; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S299).
300). The probability set value confirmation mode is a state in which the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

When it is not the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300; N), the processing after step S301 is performed as the processing regarding the progress of the game. On the other hand, if the probability setting value is being changed (
If it is the step S299; Y) or the probability set value confirmation mode (step S300; Y), the process proceeds to step S309. That is, in the probability setting value changing state and the probability setting value confirmation mode, the game is not allowed to proceed without performing the process related to winning.

In addition, when the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the special variation winning device 38 is monitored for fraud and prizes, the normal moving prize device 37 is monitored for fraud and prizes, and the winning opening is always available. The winning prize is not monitored, but one or more of these may be monitored. For example, the special variable winning device 38 and the normal variable winning device 37 may be monitored for fraud. Further, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing that is not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. For example, the processing after step S309 may not be performed. Further, the types of processing that are not executed in the probability set value change state and the probability set value confirmation mode may be different.

In step S301, the prize-winning mouth monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the prize-winning entrance switches 38a in the prize-winning entrance (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S301). The fraud & prize monitoring processing (step S302) is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize in the winning opening and detect a normal prize.

In the prize-winning mouth monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area,
The information on the illegal prize winning error notification command, the upper limit value of the illegal prize winning number (the number of illegal occurrence determinations), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission/update) is defined. In addition, the number of repeats of monitoring (number of switches) is displayed in the winning table of the winning port monitoring table.
In addition, the information of the monitoring switch bit, the lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and the lower address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined for each switch. The prize hole monitoring table is prepared in accordance with each switch to be monitored.

After that, the winning a prize monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other winning a prize switch 38a in the winning a prize mouth (special variation winning auction device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the award winning opening is not opened. A fraud that monitors the mouth for illegal prizes and detects normal prizes
The winning monitoring process (step S304) is executed.

Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in Poden (step S305) and monitor whether Poden has an illegal winning prize even though Poden is not open. At the same time, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S306) of detecting a normal prize is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switches (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) capable of always winning is prepared (step S30).
7), the winning number counter updating process (step S308) for updating the winning number is performed.

Next, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose status is to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of this embodiment, the status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Then, the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like. The monitoring of the state based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", the monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. It

Next, the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, the glass frame opening detection switch 63
The status monitoring is set based on the signal output from the, and the status scan counter value is "1".
If it is, the state monitoring is set based on the signal output from the main frame opening detection switch 64. When the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the frame radio wave incorrect signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the touch switch signal is monitored. Is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314), and if the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch/status monitoring process is executed. finish. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315).
), a gaming machine status check process for determining a status such as an error (step S)
316) is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. Monitoring of conditions based on two signals is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

After that, the payout control device 200 performs a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control can be started, and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process. Note that the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is "0", and therefore is executed once for every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 msec, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 msec.

[Probability setting value change processing]
FIG. 11 shows the probability setting value changing process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In the probability setting value changing process, first, it is determined whether the probability setting value is in a changed state (step S401), and if the probability setting value is not in a changed state (step S401; N), the probability setting value can be confirmed. The probability setting value confirmation processing is performed (step S422), and the probability setting value changing processing is ended.

If the probability setting value change state is set (step S401; Y), -1 is updated if the probability setting value extinction timer is not 0 (step S402), and it is determined whether the probability setting value extinction timer is 0. .. If the probability setting value extinction timer is 0 (step S403; Y), the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S404), and the process proceeds to step S405.
In this case, the probability setting value information is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 by the output process (see FIG. 8) described above. If the probability setting value extinction timer is not 0 (step S403;
N) moves to step S405. In this case, the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, and nothing is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 by the output processing described above.

Then, it is determined whether the probability setting value has been changed (step S405). The probability setting value changed is a state in which the probability setting value used in the game has been newly set by performing a confirming operation described later, and in this case, the probability setting value changed flag is set. When the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), the process proceeds to step S416. If the probability setting value has not been changed (step S405; N), it is determined whether there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406).

Then, in the determination as to whether there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406), it is determined whether the input state from the setting value change switch has changed to the ON state. That is, it is determined whether the probability setting value change button has been pressed. If there is no input from the setting value change switch (
The step S406; N) moves to the step S411.

If there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406; Y), the value in the work probability set value area is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 5. The values 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to settings 1 to 6, respectively, and the value in the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 each time the setting value change button is pressed. , The selected probability setting value will change sequentially. It should be noted that when the value of the work probability setting value area is +1 when the value is 5, the value is returned to 0. Further, at this stage, only the value of the work probability setting value area is changed, and the value of the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value used for the game is not changed. The probability setting value selected based on the confirming operation described later is saved in the probability setting value area. Moreover, although the number of probability setting values is six here, it is also possible to set it to a number other than this.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the working probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S408). As a result, the data displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 becomes information on the newly selected probability setting value. Then, an initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinction timer area (step S409), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S410). Thereby, as a specific display for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) from the operation of the setting value change button, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is turned off and a blank display in which nothing is displayed is performed, and then the new probability setting value information is displayed. Will be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated.

Here, the blank display in which nothing is displayed is set as the specific display, but a display other than this may be set. For example, in the case of displaying the probability setting value with numbers 1 to 6,
A display other than this number may be used as the specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display that is not used as the display of the probability setting value. Further, when displaying the probability setting value in a continuous lighting state, the updated probability setting value may be blinked as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display mode different from the display mode after the specific display has elapsed. Examples of the display mode used as the specific display include a display mode in which the display blinks, a display mode in which the blinking cycle is different from the case where the display is not the specific display, and a display mode in which the display color is different from the case where the display is not the specific display. ..

Also, information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the operation of the set value change button, the display of the display device 41 or the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46,
You may make it perform the specific notification which is a notification that the selected probability setting value was changed by the operation|movement of the board production|presentation apparatus 44, the audio|voice output by the speakers 19a and 19b, etc. FIG. That is,
The specific notification may be given together with or instead of the specific display. Further, the same display as the probability set value display device 153 may be displayed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 display device 51, and the special figure 2 display device.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (
Step S411). The touch switch is a sensor that can detect the contact of the human body with the operation handle 24, and outputs a signal when there is contact. If there is no input from this touch switch (step S411; N), the probability setting value changing process ends. If there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y), the value of the work probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (step S412). This allows
The selected probability setting value is set as the probability setting value used in the game. That is, touching the operation handle 24 is a confirming operation for confirming the selected probability setting value. Of course, an operation other than this operation may be a confirming operation, and an operating unit for the confirming operation may be provided in the setting means.

Thereafter, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S413). Next, the probability set value changed flag is set (step S415), a command for changing the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S416), and the probability set value change processing is ended. .. In the effect control device 300, the display device 41 or the sub-information display device 90 is received based on receiving the command for changing the probability setting value.
Is displayed, the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 emit light, the operation of the board effect device 44, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like to notify that the probability setting value has been changed.

On the other hand, if the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S416). If the setting key switch is not off (
Step S416; N), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operation unit is at the second position, the probability setting value changing process ends. If the setting key switch is off (step S416; Y), that is, if the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not at the second position, the RAM is set.
The clear start address 3 is set (step S417), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S418), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (
Step S419).

As a result, the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. Also, the timer for outputting the security signal is set. That is, the probability setting value region, the initial value random number region, the variation pattern random number region, and the state display region are not initialized. However, the area for initial value random numbers and the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers may be cleared. Also, among the areas for probability setting values, areas related to changing work, such as the probability setting value area for work that temporarily stores information on the probability setting values selected in the probability setting value changing state and various flags, are cleared. It Therefore, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared, and the display on the probability setting value display device 153 ends. Further, since the probability setting value changing flag is cleared, the probability setting value changing state ends.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S420), and a probability setting change end command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) ( (Step S421), and the process proceeds to step S48 of the main process shown in FIG. In the production control device 300, based on receiving the command for changing the probability setting value,
Display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46
Of the light, the operation of the board production device 44, the output of the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like.
It notifies that the change of the probability setting value has been completed. This notification also serves as a notification that the RAM has been initialized.

In the case of the present embodiment, in step S421, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information that is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the probability setting. A plurality of commands such as a change end command (a command for displaying a customer waiting demo screen and for notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. The command for ending the probability setting change may be a RAM initialization command. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability setting value information that is the information of the probability setting value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability setting value is performed, and the effect of the game is changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible to execute an effect that suggests or notifies the probability setting value, such as changing the selection probability.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player The probability setting values to which the probability values used in the lottery are assigned are set to a plurality of kinds of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). From the operation of the operation unit, the setting unit (gaming control device 100) is provided, and the setting unit includes a display unit (probability setting value display device 153) that displays information on the selected probability setting value. When the display of the display unit is updated along with the selection operation of the probability setting value, the specific display is performed for a certain period from the update. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

Further, the setting means is adapted to display, as the specific display, a display that is not used for displaying the information of the probability setting value. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

Further, the setting means is configured to display the updated information for a certain period of time in a manner different from that after the certain period of time has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
FIG. 12 shows the probability setting value confirmation processing (step S422) in the probability setting value changing processing. In this probability setting value confirmation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431). The probability set value confirmation mode is a state in which the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed. In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value confirmation mode flag can be determined because the flag is set.

If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not set (step S431; N), the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S432). As a result, a state in which nothing is displayed is set as the display of the probability setting value display device 153. After that, it is determined whether the game is in progress (step S
433).

"Playing" means a case corresponding to any of the execution of the special figure variation display game, the execution of the public figure variation display game, the special game state, and the hit state of the general figure. If the game is being played (step S433; Y), the probability setting value confirmation processing ends. That is, when the game is being played, the probability setting value confirmation mode is not entered. In this case, the effect control device 300 may be configured to transmit information indicating that the probability setting value confirmation mode cannot be entered because the game is being played, and notify that effect.

The conditions for determining that the game is being played are not limited to those described above. The condition may be one or a plurality of states selected from the running state of the special figure variation display game, the execution of the general figure variation display game, the special game state, and the hit state of the general figure. It may be determined that the game is being played when either the variable display game is being executed or the special game state is being applied. Also,
Conditions other than the above may be added. For example, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may be determined that the game is in progress and the probability setting value confirmation mode may not be entered.

When the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434). If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S434; N), the probability setting value confirmation processing ends. If the setting key switch is on (step S434; Y), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set (step S435), and the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S436).
As a result, the probability set value confirmation mode is started, and the information of the probability set value currently set is displayed as the display of the probability set value display device 153.

Then, save the initial value in the security signal control timer area (step S437),
The command for confirming the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S438), and the probability set value confirmation process ends. When the probability set value confirmation mode is started, a security signal is output as external information for a predetermined time. In the effect control device 300, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the board effect are performed based on the reception of the command during confirmation of the probability set value. The operation of the device 44, the voice output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like notify that the probability setting value is being confirmed.

On the other hand, when it is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S431; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439). If the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439; Y), the probability setting value confirmation processing ends. in this case,
Probability set value confirmation mode continues.

If the setting key switch is not on (step S439; N), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is cleared (step S440), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S441). As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends, and the probability setting value display device 153 displays nothing. Then, a command for ending confirmation of the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S442).
, The probability setting value confirmation process ends. The effect control device 300 ends the notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed based on the reception of the command for ending confirmation of the probability setting value.

That is, the probability set value confirmation mode is started by turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position with the power turned on, and ended by returning from the second position. When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value change state is set.

[Special game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step S112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the special figure game process, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 3
The input of 7a is monitored, the entire process relating to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the display of the special figure is set.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, the normal winning a prize device 3 forming the starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening
If there is a winning of the game ball in 7, various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are extracted, and the game result based on the winning is determined in advance before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the winning. Make a decision.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring processing, processing for monitoring the detection of a game ball with the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). The value of the special figure game processing timer is "
If it is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if it has timed up or has already timed up, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is registered. (Step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6).
Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the special figure variable display game is monitored, and setting of fluctuation start of the special figure variable display game, effect setting, and special figure changing are in progress. Special figure normal processing (step A8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
If the special figure game process number is "1" at step A7, the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure and the information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process are performed. (Step A
Perform 9).

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2" and the game result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the type of big hit, and big winning holes for each big hit Special figure display processing (step A10) for setting fanfare time according to the opening pattern and setting information necessary for performing fanfare/interval processing
)I do.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the special winning opening, the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, etc. are performed. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step A11).
In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "4", the interval command is set if the jackpot round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if the jackpot round is the final round, and the special winning opening remains. A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening and the big hit end process are executed. Special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary to perform
I do.
When the special figure game process number is "6" at step A7, a big hit ending process (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure normal process is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time/opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the processing during the small hit. A small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) for setting necessary information is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "8", the process for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, etc.
16) is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "9", a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls winning in the special winning opening during the small hit medium process, and a small hit ending process The small hit remaining ball process (step A17) is performed to set the information necessary for performing.
When the special figure game process number is "10" in step A7, a small hit ending process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure normal process is executed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A
19), the symbol variation control processing (step A20) relating to the control of the variation of the special symbol by the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), a symbol variation control process (step A22) relating to the control of the variation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. , The special figure game processing ends. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. To do.

The small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is a device that operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is operated). The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned flag is not set, for example, in the case where the small hit lottery is won. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term that is generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term that has different meanings.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the starting opening switch monitoring processing, first, a first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step A101), a hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, and then, 1 It is determined whether or not there is a winning in the starting opening (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting opening (step A103
In N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning in the first starting opening (step A103
In 103;Y), it is determined whether or not the special time saving is in progress (supporting universal communication) (step A).
104).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing is being shortened (step A104;
For Y), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) for transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 is performed. That is, in the time saving state, a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) does not win unless left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 does not win unless right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the right-handed state is more advantageous in the gaming state than the left-handed state, but when there is a winning in the first starting mouth during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). In addition, the right control instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) for instructing the right control.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information on hold by the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37) is prepared for a prize monitoring table (step A1).
09), a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the second starting opening (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting opening (step A111)
At N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning in the second starting opening (step A111)
111; Y), the ordinary electric auditors (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is,
It is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in the open state in which a prize can be won (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric auditors product is operating (step A112; Y). , And proceeds to the processing of step A114 to perform the subsequent processing. On the other hand, step A
When it is determined in 112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the illegal electric power generation is occurring (step A113).

In the determination as to whether or not there is a fraudulent fraud, it is determined that fraud has occurred if the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or more than the fraud determination determination number (for example, 5). The normally variable winning device 37 cannot win the game ball in the closed state, and can win the game ball only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred,
If there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, that number is counted as the number of illegal prizes.
When the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In step A113, if it is determined that the illegal attempt to generate a universal telephone is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting the information on hold by the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37) (step A114), Figure common start switch common processing (step A115)
The starting port switch monitoring process ends. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the unauthorized use of general electric power is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting port switch monitoring process ends. That is, the second starting memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) in the above-mentioned starting opening switch monitoring process.
, A110) will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 15, in the hard random number acquisition process,
First, of the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37),
The winning-free information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A121), and the starting opening 1 switch 3
It is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among 6a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124). ..

When there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, when the random number is not extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted is loaded into the hard random number latch register to be monitored and prepared (step A125).
). Then, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37), the winning information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition processing is performed. finish.

[Common processing for special drawing start switch]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the special figure starting port switch common processing, first, the starting port 1 switch 36
Of the start port 2 switch 37a and the start port 2 switch 37a, load the start port signal output count, which is the number of times information about the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10 (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). When the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the output count overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure suspension (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (step A135). When the number of reserved special maps to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N
) Ends the special figure starting port switch common processing.

If the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step A135; Y), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1 ( Step A13
6) The target starting opening winning flag is saved (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch and the special figure holding number to be monitored is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 of the hard random number acquisition process is stored as the big hit random number of RWM. The data is saved in the area (step A139). Next, the big hit symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning is to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A14).
2).
When it is determined in step A142 that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step A142)
;N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A142 that the first start opening has won (step A142).
142; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted, prepared (step A143), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A144).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Next, a starter switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared (step A147), and an effect command setting process (step A148) is performed.
The special processing start switch common processing is ended.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variation display game. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit is formed as a storage. Further, the starting storage means (game control device 100) uses various random number values extracted based on winning of the game balls into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as a first starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Various random number values that are stored and extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 37),
It is stored as a second starting memory with a predetermined number being the upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the special figure reservation information determination process (step A14) in the above-mentioned common start port switch process.
Details of 6) will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetch process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 17, first, the starting mouth winning flag saved in step A137 of the special figure starting mouth switch common processing is checked to determine whether or not the winning is to the first starting mouth (starting winning mouth 36). Yes (step A151).
When it is determined in step A151 that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step A151
; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A151 that the first start opening has won (step A151).
151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing is being shortened (step A152).

When it is determined in step A152 that the special figure is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special drawing is not in a short time (step A152;
In N), it is determined whether a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A153).
When it is determined in step A153 that a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A1
In 53; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the big hit is not in progress or the small hit is not in progress (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. The big hit determination process (step A154) is performed. When the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting mouth switch is set (step A156), and at step A140 of the special figure starting mouth switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the winning is in the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
When it is determined in step A158 that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step A158)
; N), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (step A163), and step A164
Process shifts to.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the winning is the first start opening (step A158
158; Y), a small hit determination process (step A159) for determining whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the out is set (step A
163) and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the small hit symbol prepared in step A143 of the special figure starting port switch common processing. Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the random number (step A1
62) and the process proceeds to step A164.

Then, a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A165). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A166). A167).

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step A169), the special figure reservation information determination process is ended.

The big hit determination process in step A157 and the small hit determination process in step A159 are the same as the processes shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. That is, the determination is performed according to the set probability setting value. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are similar to the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, a read-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory of the pre-reading target, and a read-ahead variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared. And transmitted to the performance control device 300. Thus, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of the variation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. The device 300 can be informed, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure changing display game. It becomes possible to inform.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (
For example, it makes a pre-judgment means for judging whether or not a special result is obtained. Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the winning prize when the starting memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

[Normal processing of special drawings]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (step A8) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure normal process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) is "0" (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first starting memory number) is "0" (step A305). And the special figure 1 reservation number is "0" (step A3
05; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step A309).
If the customer waiting demo has not started (step A309; N), the customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and effect command setting processing (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A313), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A314). Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316).
), the special figure normal processing ends. That is, when the special figure variation display game can be started, but the starting condition is not satisfied, the customer control demo command which is the customer waiting demo command forming the waiting information is produced.
Will be sent to.
On the other hand, in step A309, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A309;
In Y), the process of steps A310 to A312 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step A313.

In addition, in step A301, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0” (step A301;
N) prepares a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (step A302).
). Next, effect command setting processing (step A303) is performed, and special figure 2 variation start processing (
Step A304) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.
In addition, in step A305, if the number of reserved special figure 1 is not “0” (step A305;
N) prepares a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (step A306).
). Next, effect command setting processing (step A307) is performed, and special figure 1 variation start processing (
Step A308) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 pending number before the special figure 1 pending number is checked, if the special figure 2 pending number is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display game based on the first start memory. It forms a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start processing (step A308) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 19A, first, a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation symbol determination area (step A321),
The deviation information and the big hit information are set in the big hit flag 1 for judging whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, and it is judged whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit. The big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting the deviation information and the small hit information for the small hit flag for performing is performed.

Next, special figure 1 stop design setting processing concerning the setting of special figure 1 stop design (design information) (step A)
323) is performed, a special figure information setting process (step A324) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and various kinds of setting relating to the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game are performed. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step A325). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, "1" for the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328).
, Saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 indicator 5
The initial value (here, 100 ms) of the timer of the blinking cycle of 1) is set (step A33).
3). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start processing is ended.

[Special map 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same process as the process of the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is intended for memory.

As shown in FIG. 19B, first, a special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the variation symbol determination area (step A341), and second.
The big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a big hit is subjected to big hit flag 2 setting processing (step A342) for setting deviation information and big hit information.

Next, special figure 2 stop design setting processing (step A) relating to the setting of special figure 2 stop design (design information)
343), after performing special figure information setting processing (step A344) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern, various kinds of settings relating to the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game are performed. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set, is prepared (step A345). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" for the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348).
, Saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 5
The initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer 2) is set (step A35).
3). Then, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start processing is ended.

In addition, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start processing or special figure 2 variation start processing, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests or informs the probability setting value, such as selecting a variation pattern according to the probability setting value or changing the selection probability of the variation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process
) And the big hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described.

As shown in FIG. 20, in this jackpot determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A381). The upper limit judgment value table is provided for each probability setting value, and the upper limit judgment value in the high probability state and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability state (normal probability state) are defined respectively. Here, a corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value. The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value, the big hit judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

Next, the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step A382), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same value regardless of the probability setting value or the probability state (high probability state or normal probability state),
The lower limit judgment value may be different depending on the probability setting value and the probability state. In this case, like the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is defined for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower limit judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. And set it. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be combined into a judgment value table.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A383; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A389), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. It should be noted that the out-of-range in step A389 means that it is not a big hit, and there is a possibility that it will be judged as a small hit in the subsequent small hit determination processing. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A3
83; N) determines whether or not there is a high probability state (step A384). Then, in the high probability state (step A384; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is acquired (step A384).
385), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A38).
7). If it is not in the high probability state (step A384; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A386), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387). .. The upper limit judgment value acquired here is acquired by referring to the upper limit judgment value table set in step A381.

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; Y), the deviation is set as the judgment result (step A358), and the big hit judgment process is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A387; N), that is, if it is the big hit, the big hit is set as the judgment result (step A389), and the big hit judgment process is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process
) And the small hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described.

As shown in FIG. 21, in this small hit determination process, first, a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A401). The small hit upper limit judgment value is provided for each probability setting value. Also, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether or not it is in a high probability state. Further, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value do not overlap in the same probability setting value. The range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value for different probability setting values may or may not overlap.

The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, which is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value, the small hit judgment is performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability setting value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402).
). Here, the value of the small hit lower limit determination value is the same even if the probability setting values are different. When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A402; Y), deviation is set as the judgment result (step A404), and the big hit judgment process is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402; N), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A404), and the small hit judgment processing is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A403; N), that is, if it is the small hit, the small hit is set as the judgment result (step A405), and the small hit judgment process is ended. To do.

Similar to the case of the big hit judgment, the small hit upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability setting value may be set first, and the small hit upper limit judgment value may be acquired from the set upper limit judgment value table. The upper limit judgment value in the big hit judgment and the small hit upper limit judgment value in the small hit judgment may be collectively defined in the judgment value table provided for each probability setting value. Further, the small hitting lower limit judgment value is the same even if the probability setting values are different, but the small hitting lower limit judgment value may be changed depending on the probability setting value. In this case, depending on the probability setting value, Select the small hit lower limit judgment value.

Further, the process of setting the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381)
Alternatively, in the process of setting the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A401), if the value indicating the referred probability setting value is an abnormal value such as not corresponding to any probability setting value, The setting may be performed as a preset probability setting value (for example, setting 1), or the game may be stopped and an error may be notified when an abnormality occurs. Further, although the probability setting value is referenced for each of the big hit determination and the small hit determination, when the probability setting value is set in the probability setting value changing state, the upper limit setting table corresponding to the set probability setting value is set. Alternatively, a process for setting a small hit upper limit determination value may be performed, and only this may be referred to when determining a big hit or a small hit.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure variation process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag (special figure 1 variation flag or special figure 2 variation flag) is prepared (step A
601), effect command setting processing is performed (step A602). That is, the symbol stop command forming stop information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the variation time of the special figure variation display game being executed ends and the result is derived and displayed. In the production control device 300,
With the reception of this symbol stop command, the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is stopped and the result is stopped and displayed.

Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, the display time is set to 600 msec regardless of whether the stop symbol pattern is out of alignment, the big hit symbol pattern, or the small hit symbol pattern, but the display time may be different depending on the stop symbol pattern. .. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, the process number "2" related to the process during special figure display is set as the process number (step A6).
05), the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A606).

Next, the signal related to the end of fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 during changing signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal related to end of fluctuation of special figure 2 (eg, special design) 2 Turn OFF the changing signal) to the test signal output data area (step A608), and the control timer initial in the symbol determination number signal control timer area related to the number of times the special figure variation display game for output to the external information terminal is executed. The value (for example, 256 msec) is saved (step A609). After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, the stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 1 display device 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A610). ), as a control information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, a stop flag related to a fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display device 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A611), and the special figure changing process is ended.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, details of the special figure displaying process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. 23 and 24, in the special figure displaying process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM's Processing (step A702) which clears the small hitting flag territory is done.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process are loaded. (Step A703), processing of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (step A704) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705), and it is a big hit (step A70).
5; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is ON, which relates to the start of the big hit of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 big hit),
The special symbol 2 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A705; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot ((
Step A706), if it is determined that the big hit (step A706; Y), a test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory device is ON, the character device is ON, the test signal regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game. Signal is ON during continuous operation device is ON, signal per special symbol is ON)
The data is saved in the M test signal output data area (step A707), and the processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. The number of rounds is saved in the round upper limit value area (step A710). Next, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM round LE is acquired.
The data is saved in the D pointer area (step A711).

Next, the decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop design pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting processing (step A71).
Perform 3). After that, a probability information command related to information that sets the probability of a hit result in the ordinary figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, the symbol information set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting processing (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern)
The fanfare command corresponding to is prepared (step A716), and effect command setting processing (step A717) is performed. This fanfare command forms the special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the special winning opening information and a signal corresponding to the probability of a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the probability state. Each ON/OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is O when the jackpot is a jackpot (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1).
N, big hit without payout (so-called sudden big hit, etc. Big winning opening opening information is big winning opening opening information 1
), it is ON during a big hit in the time saving state, and is OFF otherwise.
The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit is a big hit and is OFF when the big hit is a big hit.

After that, the big winning fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 470 m) corresponding to the state of the winning probability opening information and the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure changing display game and the special figure changing display game.
0 ms, 7700 ms or 300 ms) is set (step A719), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720).
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the special winning opening fraudulent winning number area of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) corresponding to the special opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the big winning opening corresponding to the special opening opening information is awarded. The fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area (step A72).
3). After that, the fanfare/fanfare/
During the interval, the process shift setting process 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure displaying process is ended. That is, the game control device 100 converts the special variation winning device 38 to the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It constitutes a special game state generating means for generating a state.

On the other hand, in step A706, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706
N) determines whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A72).
5; Y), a high-probability-variation-number update process (step of updating the value (high-probability-variation number) in the high-probability-variation-number region for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in a high-probability state (step A
726), the production mode information check process regarding the production mode setting (step A727)
To determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A
728).

When it is determined in step A728 that the probability of the special figure is not high (step A728; N
), load the decoration special drawing command from the decoration special drawing command area and prepare (Step A
729) and effect command setting processing (step A730). Next, the small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), and the effect command setting process (step A73).
2) is performed and the process proceeds to step A733. This small hit fanfare command also forms the special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

When it is determined in step A728 that the probability of a special figure is high (step A72
8; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. Thus, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment
In 0, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but in order not to make the player aware of the occurrence of the small hit, The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Next, "7" related to the small hit fanfare processing is set as the processing number (step A734), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A735).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A736), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is output (big hit + small hit is output. )) in the external information output data area (step A)
737), a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738).

Next, the special winning opening fraudulent prize number area is cleared (step A739), and the fraud monitoring outside period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A740).
Next, a signal related to the right-handing instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A741), and the display LED during right-handing (for example, the first gaming state display portion 57) is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A742), and the special figure displaying process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not the small hit (step A725; N), the number of high-probability fluctuations for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the high-probability state is high. High-probability fluctuation number update processing (step A743) for updating the value of the area (high-probability fluctuation number), and effect mode information check processing (step A7) regarding effect mode setting.
44) to set the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation corresponding to the effect mode number (step A7).
45), it is determined whether or not the effect remaining rotational speed and the switching preparation remaining rotational speed match (step A7).
46). In addition, the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or may be the same value in any effect mode of the effect modes. It may be (rotation speed), or may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes.
When it is determined in step A746 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (step A746; N), "0" related to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A749). ), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A750), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A751). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A752).
), the special figure display process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step A746, when it is determined that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A746; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A747), and the effect command setting is performed. After performing the process (step A748), the process proceeds to step A749. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing prefetch production from being performed several rotations before the production mode is switched. By transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, production is performed across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions from occurring.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (step S113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the general figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process relating to the general figure variation display game is controlled, the display of the general figure is set, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the universal figure game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a universal electric prize switch for monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the universal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the universal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, it is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the universal figure game processing number. A process of setting the universal figure game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process of acquiring a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number is performed using the table (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the universal figure game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, if the general figure game process number is "0", the start of variation of the general figure variation display game is monitored, and setting of variation start of the general figure variation display game, effect setting, and variation of general figure are performed. The normal/universal process (step B8) is performed to set the information necessary for the process.
When the figure game process number is "1" in step B7, a figure figure changing process (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the figure image displaying process.

Further, in step B7, if the universal figure game processing number is "2", if the result of the universal figure variable display game is a hit, the universal battery open time is set according to whether or not the state is in a time saving state. In addition, processing for displaying a general figure (step B10) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the processing for displaying a general figure.
In step B7, when the figure game process number is “3”, the figure figure hitting process is performed to continue the process or to set the information necessary for the process The process (step B11) is performed.

If the universal figure game process number is "4" at step B7, the ordinary electric ball remaining process (step B12) for setting the information necessary for performing the universal figure per end process is performed.
If the figure/universal figure game process number is "5" in step B7, a figure/universal figure end process (step B13) is performed to set information necessary for performing the figure/general figure normal process.

After that, after preparing the universal figure fluctuation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal figure indicator (step B14), the symbol variation control processing concerning the control of variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal figure indicator 53 (step B15) is performed, and the ordinary figure game process is ended.
On the other hand, in step B4, the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4;
N), that is, if it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (step B8) in the above-mentioned ordinary figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the normal/universal figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal figure reservation number is "0" (step B301), and when the normal/universal figure reservation number is "0" (step B301; Y). )
Sets "0", which is related to the ordinary figure normal process, as the process number (step B322), and saves the process number in the universal figure game process number area (step B323). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the ordinary figure normal processing is ended.

In addition, when the general figure reservation number is not “0” (step B301; N), a random number is loaded from the RWM per random number storage area (for reservation number 1), per symbol random number storage area (for reservation number 1), The loaded area, that is, the hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B302), and the probability of a hit result in the universal figure variation display game is It is determined whether or not the probability that the figure is higher than the normal probability (that is, the probability that the figure is low) is high, that is, the state is in a time saving state (step B303).

If it is not during the high probability of universal figure (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit determination value) at the time of low probability of universal figure is set (step B304), and if it is during high probability of universal figure (step B).
303; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of high probability of universal figure (step B305).
After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B306), and when the value of the hit random number is not greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B306; N), the value of the hit random number is step B304 or B305. It is determined whether the value is less than the lower limit judgment value set in (Step B
307).

When the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B306; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B3
07; Y) saves the deviation information in the hit flag area (step B308), sets the deviation stop symbol number (step B309), and saves the deviation symbol information in the general figure stop symbol information area (step B310). , The stop symbol number is saved in the universal symbol stop symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B
311), the hit stop symbol number corresponding to the hit symbol random number loaded in step B302 is set (step B312), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B313). ), the stop symbol number is saved in the universal symbol stop symbol area (step B314).

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at the time of low probability of universal figure is 0/251, the probability of hitting at the time of high probability of universal figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is “251”, and the lower probability lower limit judgment value is “251”, and the high probability lower limit determination value is “1”. Therefore, at the time of low probability of ordinary figure, there is a deviation when the value of the random number per hit is "0" to "250". Further, at the time of high probability of universal figure, the case where the value of the random number per hit is any of "1" to "250" is a hit, and the case where the value of the random number per hit is "0" is out of range.
Further, in the case of the present embodiment, there are two types of winning symbols.

After saving the stop symbol number in the general symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
After that, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), and the empty area after the shift is set to 0.
It is cleared (step B317), and the number of universal figure reservations is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game relating to the oldest universal figure hold number 1, a process of advancing the ranks of the universal figure hold numbers 2 to 4 that have been held after the regular figure hold number 1 one by one. I do. By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 for public figures in the random number storage area per general figure to the number of reserved figures of 4 for general figures are moved from the number of reserved figures of 1 for general figures in the random number storage area for one figure to 3 for the number of retained figures Will be done.
Then, the value for the figure hold number 4 in the random number storage area per figure is cleared, and the figure hold number is decremented by one.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation pattern random number 3 is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B3).
20). Then, the general figure changing process shift setting process (step B321) for shifting to the general figure changing process is performed, and the general figure normal process ends. That is, the game control device 100 executes the general figure fluctuation display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball in the general figure starting gate 34 (inflow area) (based on the general figure starting memory). To make.
In the case of the present embodiment, in step B320, the fluctuation time is set to 500 msec with a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. ..

[Processing during fluctuations in general]
Next, details of the routine figure changing process (step B9) in the routine figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the routine figure changing process, first, the process number is set to "2" related to the routine figure displaying process (step B401), and the process number is saved in the routine figure game process number area. (Step B402). After that, the general figure display time (for example, 600 msec), which is the display time of the result of the general figure variation display game on the general figure display 53, is saved in the general figure game processing timer area (step B403), and the general figure change end is completed. Save the signal (for example, turn off the signal during normal symbol 1) in the test signal output data area (step B404),
A stop flag indicating that the general/universal figure variation display game is stopped is saved in the general/universal figure variation control flag area (step B405), and the general/universal figure variation processing is ended.

[Processing during normal figure display]
Next, the details of the processing for displaying a general figure (step B10) in the above-described general figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the normal figure displaying process, first, the hit flag (hit information or deviant information) set in the normal figure normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), "0" which is related to the normal figure normal process is set as the process number (step B515), and the process number is saved in the general figure game process number area (step). B516). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the processing for displaying the universal figure is ended.

On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), the hit process setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer (eg, "0" Or "5") is acquired and saved in the ordinary control pointer area in step B505. Then, the value of the hit end pointer ((
For example, “4” or “7”) is acquired and saved in the end pointer area per universal figure (step B506). Then, the time to open the universal call (eg, 1700m) corresponding to the universal pattern stop symbol information
Second or 2600 msec) and save it in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B5).
07).

Next, "3" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure hit medium process (step B
508), the processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (step B509).
After that, a signal related to the start of hitting the universal figure variation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 hitting signal is ON) and a signal related to the start of the normal electric actuation (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON) are test signals. The data is saved in the output data area (step B510), and a signal for driving (turning on) the general electric solenoid is output, so the on data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B511).

Further, the information of the Poden count number area that stores the number of winnings to the ordinary variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B512), and the number of winnings to the ordinary variation winning device 37 during the fraud monitoring period is stored. The information in the fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step B513). Then, the flag (outside fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the processing for displaying the universal figure ends.

[Purpose of medium processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure hitting process (step B11) in the aforementioned general figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the processing for hitting a universal figure, first, a control pointer for hitting a universal figure is loaded and prepared (step B601). It is determined (step B602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer during normal drawing is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (step B602; N
) Updates the control pointer for hitting the ordinary figure by +1 (step B603), and performs a branching process according to the value of the control pointer for hitting the ordinary figure (value before updating +1 in step B603) (step B604).
In addition, when the value of the control pointer in the normal figure is equal to or more than the upper limit value (step B602; Y)
Performs branch processing according to the value of the control pointer during normal drawing without performing the processing of updating the processing control pointer area during normal drawing by +1 in step B603 (step B604).

If the value of the control pointer is "0", "2" or "5", the process proceeds to step B605 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, and thus the normal variation winning device corresponding to the control pointer. The wait time after the blockage of 37 is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B605), and the OFF data is saved in the universal electric solenoid output data area to turn off the ordinary electric solenoid 37c (step B606). The process in FIG.

If the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B607 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is opened. The ordinary electric opening time, which is the opening time, is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B607), and the on data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area to turn on the ordinary electric solenoid 37c (step B608). The process is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is "6", the process proceeds to step B609 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, and thus the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is opened.
Save the opening time of the electric power, which is the opening time of
9) In order to turn on the ordinary electric solenoid 37c, the on data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (step B610), and the ordinary drawing hitting process is terminated.

If the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B611 to end the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 and perform the normal electric remaining ball process, and thus the process number. Is set to "4" (step B611). Then, this processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (step B612), and the ordinary electric ball remaining processing time is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B613). After that, in order to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 37c, the off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area (step B614), and the general-purpose hit processing is ended.

Here, in this embodiment, for example, 300 m is set as the wait time in step B605.
Seconds, in step B607, the normal battery opening time is 1700 ms, in step B609, the normal battery opening time is 2600 ms, and in step B613, the normal battery remaining ball processing time is 6 seconds.
Save 00 ms.
Further, when the universal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 1", "0" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the routine figure displaying process shown in FIG. In step B506, "4" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing for displaying the universal map, "1700 msec" is acquired as the universal communication opening time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has passed, the normal call release time is "1700 msec", so the normal call is released for 1700 msec. The time is set and then the control pointer is updated to "1" during the public figure hit, so the general electric train opens for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer during the public figure hit "2".
The wait time of 300 msec is set for updating to No. 4, and then the control pointer for the public figure is released for 1700 msec because the control pointer is updated to "3". Since it is updated to "", the processing time of the remaining electric ball of Poden is set to 600 msec.

If the universal figure stop symbol is the "hit symbol 2", "5" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the routine figure displaying process shown in FIG. In step B506, "7" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing for displaying the universal map, "2600 msec" is acquired as the universal communication opening time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has passed, the normal call release time is “2600 msec”, so the normal call is released for 2600 msec. The time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "6" during the public figure, so the electric train is opened for 2600 msec. Then, the control pointer is updated to "7" during the public figure for 600 msec. Hoden remaining ball processing time is set.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S117) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information edit processing, payout command transmission processing (step S111)
, Winning hole switch/state monitoring process (step S107), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S)
115), based on the monitoring result in the board radio wave irregularity monitoring process (step S116), information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement center internal management device or a test shooting test device is created and set in an output buffer. Perform processing, etc.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the external information editing process, first, when the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step S801; N) and the main body frame opening error is not occurring (step S802; N). , OFF data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), OFF data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. ..
On the other hand, if the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y), or
When the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the ON data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S805), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is stored. The data is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

If the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", it is updated by -1 ( Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the RAM is started by the RAM clear in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
When the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809) and step S810. Process shifts to. Also,
When the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the process of step S809 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S810. ..

Then, when the magnet illegality is occurring (step S810; Y), when the board electric wave irregularity is occurring (step S811; Y), and when the frame electric wave irregularity is occurring (step S81).
2) Y), when the illegal call is occurring (step S813; Y), or when the special winning opening is occurring (step S814; Y), the ON data of the security signal is output as external information. The data is saved in the data area (step S817), the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and step S819.
Process shifts to. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, neither the occurrence of magnet fraud (step S810; N), the occurrence of board radio fraud (step S811; N), nor the occurrence of frame radio fraud (step S812; N).
If it is not in the middle of the occurrence of the fraudulent normal communication (step S813; N) and is not in the middle of the special winning opening fraud (step S814; N), it is determined whether or not the switch abnormality is occurring (step S815).
When the switch abnormality is occurring (step S815; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. If no switch abnormality is occurring (step S815)
;N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the process proceeds to step S819.

Then, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S819) for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a start opening signal editing process for editing the winning signal of the starting opening (step S820).
)I do.
Next, if the symbol fixed number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not "0", -1 is updated (step S821). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol fixed number control timer is "0" (step S822).

When the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S822; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the OFF data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S823), the external information editing process ends.
If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S822; N), that is, if the time is not up, the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S822). S824), the external information editing process ends.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the performance control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 32 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3) and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Then, the generation of display data is permitted (step C
5) A random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) of creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The reading of the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in the effect button input process, when the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed, the effect contents are changed.

Then, the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal is set, and the LED by the player is set.
Hall/player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the liquid crystal and the volume is performed (step C10). Next, a random number updating process (step C11) for updating the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) that analyzes and responds to the command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) that performs settings for controlling the progress of the effect and edits of drawing commands. ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, since a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds) is created, a V blank interrupt (1/6)
If 0 seconds is entered twice, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate, and for example, the image may be updated (frame switching) at 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frame switching at a timing later than 1/60 seconds). May be switched). When it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and LED control for the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, the sub information display device 90, and the like. The decoration control process (step C18) to be performed and the movable body control process (step C19) to control the motor and the solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed,
The process returns to the process of clearing WDT (step C8).

[Reception command check processing]
FIG. 33 shows the received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this reception command check processing, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the command reception number (
(Step C201), it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (Step C202).
.. Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check processing ends. When it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Then, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204
), the command read index is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not the copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C206).
As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer,
The contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis operation is performed in the command area. As a result, the command (data) is prepared in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command.
Can be moved to make room. In addition, the command analysis can be collectively performed in one round of the main processing.

When it is determined in step C206 that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. Further, when it is determined that the copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Then, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N),
It returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is ended. As described above, in the received command check processing, the commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are analyzed together. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Reception command analysis processing]
FIG. 34 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). MODE and A
When it is determined that the CT is within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
, It is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C23).
4).

When it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C232; C2
34; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
In step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235)
;; Y), the variable system command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable system command (
In Step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (Step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit mid-stage effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) or a command related to small win mid-range effect (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen). And MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C237; Y), the big hit system command process (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special symbol). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239; Y), the symbol type command process (
Step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of the symbol-based command (
In step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of a single-shot system command such as a hold number command or an error command (step C241). The single-shot command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense by combination such as a symbol command and a variable command. This one-shot system command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information system command, an error/illegal system command, and a model designation command. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot type command (step C24
1; Y), the single-shot system command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command ((
In step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the prefetching symbol type command (step C243). When MODE is determined to be in the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; Y), the prefetch symbol system command process (step C2)
44) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

When it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetching symbol type command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetching variable type command (step C245). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variable system command (step C245; Y), the prefetch variable system command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation type command (step C245; N)
Ends the received command analysis processing.

The look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as the pre-reading notice or the pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variability display game corresponding to the starting memory (holding) in which the special figure variability display game is not executed becomes a big hit when it is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of variation pattern) with a predetermined reliability, the decoration special figure starting memory display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a manner different from the normal mode, or the display device 41. It is an effect such as performing an effect display. Then, the pre-reading system commands (pre-reading variable system command and pre-reading pattern system command) is a command that gives advance notice of the variation pattern and the stop pattern corresponding to the starting memory that is the target of pre-reading effect, and from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the performance control device 300. Note that normal variable-type commands and symbol-type commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

Further, with respect to a command related to power-on and a command related to a probability setting value, a corresponding process is performed by a single-shot system command process. Examples of commands related to power-on include commands for power failure recovery and commands for RAM initialization. Examples of the command relating to the probability setting value include commands for changing probability setting, changing probability setting value, ending probability setting change, confirming probability setting value, and ending confirmation of probability setting value.

In the above first embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the probability set value confirmation mode. However, after the power is turned on, the setting key switch 152 is turned on. Even in this case, the state may be changed to the probability setting value change state. However, since the RAM is initialized with the end of the probability setting value change state, it is possible to execute the special figure variation display game, the general figure variation display game, the special game state, or the general figure hit state. It may be a condition that does not correspond to. Further, it may be on condition that it is in a customer waiting state. Further, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, the state may not be changed to the probability set value changing state.

In addition, although it has been stated that the RAM 111C is initialized when the probability setting value change state ends,
The RAM 111C may not be initialized unless it is determined that the data in the M111C is abnormal.

Further, although the probability values corresponding to the respective probability setting values are different, the same probability value may be assigned to different probability setting values. FIG. 35A shows the probability set value in this embodiment. The value of the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C is set to a value of 0-5. The work probability setting value region is also the same. Settings 1 to 6 are assigned as probability setting values corresponding to the values in the probability setting value area. The probability setting value display device 153 displays 1 to 6 corresponding to the value of the probability setting value. Different probability values are assigned to the probability values in the settings 1 to 6.

FIG. 35B shows an example in which probability values are assigned differently. In this example, the probability values of setting 1 to setting 3 are assigned as setting 4 to setting 6. Therefore, it is possible to switch the probability values in three steps. Other than this, it is similar to FIG. By doing so, if the six-step probability values are unnecessary, only the probability values need to be different, and the design can be easily changed.

Note that which probability setting value is assigned to which probability value is arbitrary, and for example, setting 1 and setting 6, setting 2 and setting 5, setting 3 and setting 4 may be the same probability value. Since the value of the probability setting value area (working probability setting value area) is updated by +1 by operating the setting value changing button, the order of probability values that change when the setting value changing button is operated by changing the allocation is different. In order. Further, for example, if the same probability value as another probability setting value is assigned to two probability setting values, the change step can be set to four steps and can be set to any step from one step to six steps.

FIG. 35C also shows an example in which probability values are assigned differently. In this example, FIG.
The settings 4 to 6 in Step 1 are set to Settings 1 to 3, and the probability set value display device 153 is displayed.
The display in (1) is set to 1 to 3 corresponding to this. As a result, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 and the probability value correspond to each other, and it is possible for the staff in charge of the work to easily understand the probability value.

FIG. 35D also shows an example in which probability values are assigned differently. In this example, all the settings are 1, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is all 1, and the probability values are all the same. That is, it is possible to set substantially only one probability value, and even when the function of changing the probability value is not necessary, it is possible to deal with it only by setting the value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100. In this case, even if the set value change button is operated, the same display is displayed on the probability set value display device 153, but the operation is performed by performing the specific display (for example, blank display) as described above. It will be easier for the worker to understand that it has been accepted.

Although the number of values in the probability setting value region is 6, the number may be other than this. For example, in the case of FIGS. 35B and 35C, the number of values in the probability setting value area may be three. Also, in the case of FIG. 35D, the number of values in the probability setting value area may be one. In addition, the number of values in the probability setting value region may be 7 or more in order to be able to set a larger number of steps. Although the probability setting value to which the probability value is assigned is selected, the probability value may be selected. In this case, the probability setting value display device 153 displays the selected probability value.

Also, although the big hit probability value is assigned according to the probability setting value, the small hit probability value is also assigned, and the small hit probability value is also changed according to the change of the probability setting value. ing. The big hit probability value and the small hit probability value corresponding to each probability setting value can be independently determined. However, when only the big hits and the small hits are obtained as a result of the special figure variation display game, it is necessary to set the probability value of the small hits according to the probability value of the big hits. Further, the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the big hit and the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the small hit may be set separately. Further, the probability value for small hits may be a constant value regardless of the probability setting value. Further, the probability of hitting the universal figure variation display game may be set according to a probability setting value defining a probability value of a big hit, or may be set independently.

Further, when the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, the probability setting value display device 153 and the like are provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100, when the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary. Alternatively, the setting sub-board may be removed, and the sub-board or the like that has undergone termination processing such as GND connection may be connected to the connection portion of the game control device 100 with the setting sub-board. By doing so, only the function of changing the probability value can be eliminated without changing the configuration of the game control device 100, and the cost can be reduced. Further, in a gaming machine that does not have a probability varying function, the operation probability M may be provided for each probability setting value.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment has the same configuration, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. explain. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the game control device 100 transmits a command instructing the payout to the payout control device 200 when the power is turned on.

The payout control device 200 in the present modified example includes a storage unit capable of holding the stored contents even when the power is off. This storage means is adapted to store the information of the payout command received from the game control device 100, and to pay out based on the information stored here. In this way, the storage means of the payout control device 200 can hold the stored contents in the power-off state, so that the game control device 100 sequentially sends the payout commands regardless of the state of the payout busy signal. .. Therefore, the information of the payout command that has not been paid out is stored in the storage means of the payout control device 200.

[Main processing]
The gaming machine of the present modification performs the main processing shown in FIG. 36 instead of the main processing shown in FIG. In this process, when a command (specific information) for setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), a command (specific information) for payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200. (Step S51). Payout control device 2
At 00, upon receipt of this payout instruction command, the payout is started based on the information backed up in its own storage means. By doing so, even if the backup data of the game control device 100 is damaged, the payout can be made based on the information stored in the payout control device 200, and the profit of the player is prevented from being impaired. it can.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the command of the setting change instruction, in addition to the notification of urging the probability setting value to be changed, the effect control device 300 may also notify that the payout may be performed. May be. Moreover, the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200, not limited to the above case. S40) and also when the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S44), the payout control device 20
A payout command (specific information) may be transmitted to 0.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player A game control unit (game control device 100) for controlling, a production control unit (production control device 300) for controlling the production of the game, and a probability value used for lottery of the game are assigned based on the information from the game control unit. A setting means that makes it possible to select the obtained probability setting value from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) Based on the payout information from the game control device 100) and the game control device, a payout control device (payout control device 20) for controlling the payout of the game medium.
0) and, the game control means, the storage means (R
AM111C), the validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on, and the operation of the operation unit for selecting the probability setting value. Based on the initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means, and when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not valid, it is specified. The information is transmitted to the effect control means and the payout control means to stop the control of the game, the effect control means issues a notification prompting the selection of the probability setting value based on the reception of the specific information, and the payout control means is the power source. A payout information storage unit capable of holding the stored contents even in the cutoff state and capable of storing payout information received from the game control unit, and when the specific information is received, based on the payout information stored in the payout information storage unit, the game medium. It means that the payout is controlled.
Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the profit obtained by the player from being impaired. Further, by initializing the RAM 111C, the probability setting value information set at the game store is also lost and the initial value is set, but by initializing the notification by prompting the selection of the probability setting value. By this, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value that is not intended by the gaming shop from being left set.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment has the same configuration, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of this modification has a plurality of conditions for determining the selected probability setting value.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 37 is performed instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. In the probability setting value changing process, a confirmation condition monitoring process (step S450) is performed to monitor whether or not a condition for confirming the selected probability setting value is satisfied.

[Fixed condition monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the definite condition monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411), and if there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y). ) Clears the end standby flag (step S45).
7), the processing of steps S412 to S415 is performed, and the finalized condition monitoring processing ends.

That is, when the worker performs the first operation of touching the operation handle 24, the first confirming condition based on the input from the touch switch is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. The end standby flag is a flag used to monitor the establishment of the second definite condition as described later, and here, the second definite condition is established because the first definite condition based on the input from the touch switch is established. Since it is no longer necessary to monitor, the end wait flag is cleared.

On the other hand, when there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), that is, when the first confirmation condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether there is an end standby flag (step S451).
). If there is an end standby flag (step S451; Y), the process proceeds to step S455. In this case, monitoring of the second definite condition has already started. If there is no end standby flag (step S451; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452).

If the setting key switch is not in the off state (step S452; N), the finalized condition monitoring process ends. In this case, the probability setting value changing state continues. Further, when the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452; Y), the initial value (for example, 3) is set in the change end timer area.
Second) is saved (step S453), and the end standby flag is set (step S454).
).

Then, if the change end timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S455), and it is determined whether the change end timer is 0 (step S456). When the change end timer is not 0 (step S456; N), the fixed condition monitoring process ends. If the change end timer is 0 (step S456; Y), the processing from step S457 is performed, and the finalized condition monitoring processing ends. That is, the second confirmation condition is satisfied when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation of turning off the setting key switch which is the second operation is performed, and the selected probability setting value is set. It has become so.

As described above, in the present modification, the probability setting value selected when either the first confirming condition or the second confirming condition is satisfied is set as the probability setting value used in the game.
Until these confirmation conditions are satisfied, the selected probability setting value is stored in the working probability setting value area, and the information in the probability setting value area in which the probability setting value used in the game is stored is changed. Absent. Therefore, when the power is shut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, the selected probability setting value is discarded and the original probability setting value is set.

In the probability setting value changing state, it may be notified that the probability setting value selected by touching the operation handle 24 is set. This notification may be always performed in the probability setting value changing state, or may be performed only in the state in which the end standby flag is set. Further, the first confirmation condition and the second confirmation condition are not limited to the above-mentioned conditions and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the second confirmation condition may be only that the setting key switch is turned off. Alternatively, the probability setting value selected may be set when three or more definite conditions are prepared and any one of them is satisfied.

Further, although it is assumed that the original probability setting value is set when the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, a predetermined probability setting value may be set. For example, when the probability setting value change state is started, the information of the probability setting value area is set to an initial value (for example, setting 1), and when the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, this initial value is set. May be set. As the initial value in this case, an arbitrary probability setting value can be set in advance. For example, the same probability setting value as the probability setting value set when the area for the probability setting value of the RAM 111C is initialized. It may be set value.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player The control unit (game control device 100) for controlling, and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned, the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152),
And a setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)), and the setting means is one of a plurality of confirmation conditions. It means that the probability setting value selected is set based on the fact that either of the conditions is established. Therefore, the probability setting value can be surely changed. Further, by providing a plurality of confirmation conditions, the degree of freedom of work can be increased, and the work efficiency at the game shop can be improved.

Also, the setting means, when the power is cut off before any of the plurality of definite conditions are satisfied,
This means that the selected probability setting value is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

In addition, the plurality of finalizing conditions include a first finalizing condition and a second finalizing condition, the first finalizing condition is that a predetermined first operation is performed, and the second finalizing condition is the first operation. Means that a predetermined time elapses after a different predetermined second operation is performed. Therefore, the probability setting value can be surely changed.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment has the same configuration, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of this modification does not include a setting key operation unit in the setting means, and the setting key switch 152 is not provided. In addition, the transition condition to the changeable state in which the probability setting value can be changed is different.

[Main processing]
The gaming machine of the present modification performs the main processing shown in FIG. 39 in place of the main processing shown in FIG. In this processing, if the backed up information is normal and the probability setting value change state is not (step S21; N), is the setting value change switch turned on from the previously read state of the third input port 124? Is determined (step S61).

If the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S61; N), the process proceeds to step S30 in FIG. 6 to perform the process when the power failure is normally restored. If the set value change switch is in the on state (step S61; Y), the shift determination process is performed (step S62). As will be described later, in the transition determination processing, it is determined whether or not the transition condition to the probability setting value change state is satisfied, and if the transition condition is satisfied, the probability setting value changing flag is set. ..

When the probability setting value changing flag is set in the shift determination processing (step S63; Y), the process for initializing the RAM and changing the setting value to the probability setting value changing state Then, the process proceeds to step S35 of 6. In this modification, the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process, and thus the process of step S37 need not be performed. Further, when the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the shift determination processing (step S63; N)
Shifts to step S41 of FIG. 6 in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM area for game control.

On the other hand, when the backed up information is not normal, RAM clear start address 1
After setting (step S25), it is determined from the previously read state of the third input port 124 whether the set value change switch is in the on state (step S64). If the setting value change switch is not in the ON state (step S64; N), a setting change instruction command (specific information)
Is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S28), RAM access is prohibited (step S29), control is stopped, and power-off of the gaming machine is awaited.

If the set value change switch is in the on state (step S64; Y), the shift determination process is performed (step S65). This shift determination process is the same process as step S62.
When the probability setting value changing flag is set in the shift determination process (step S66; Y),
In order to perform the initialization process of the RAM and the process of changing the probability setting value to the probability setting value changing state, the process proceeds to step S35 of FIG. In addition, when the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the shift determination process (step S66; N), the process proceeds to step S27.

[Transition determination process]
FIG. 40 shows the shift determination processing (steps S62 and S65) in the above-mentioned main processing. In this transition determination process, first, an initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is saved in the transition standby timer area (step S71), the state of the input port 1 is read (step S72), and it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S72). Step S73).

In this modified example, a staff member can shift to a probability setting value changing state by inserting game balls into the winning area in a predetermined order within a predetermined time, and the winning area provided in the gaming area 32. The state of the input port 1 to which the detection signal from is input determines whether this transition condition is satisfied. If this transition condition is satisfied (step S73; Y),
The probability setting value changing flag is set (step S76), and the transition determination process ends. As a result, the state is changed to the probability setting value change state.

When the transition condition is not satisfied (step S73; N), the transition standby timer is set to 0.
If not, -1 is updated (step S74), and it is determined whether the shift standby timer is 0 (step S75). Then, when the shift standby timer is not 0 (step S75; N), the process returns to step S72. That is, the detection signal from the winning area is monitored for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

If the shift standby timer is 0 (step S75; Y), the shift determination process ends. That is, when the transition condition is not satisfied within the predetermined time, the transition determination process is terminated without setting the probability setting value changing flag. As a result, in the case where the backed up data is normal, in order to perform the initialization process of the RAM area for game control, step S of FIG.
41, and if the backed up data is abnormal, step S
28 and S29 are performed and the control is stopped.

The transition condition may or may not be changeable at the game store. Further, the transition condition is to put the game balls in the winning area in a predetermined order, but a predetermined number of game balls may be put in the predetermined winning area in any order. Further, a predetermined detection by one detection means may be used as the transition condition. In this case, the condition may be that only the detection is performed by the detection unit, or the condition that the detection is performed a plurality of times by the detection unit is a predetermined mode (the number of times of detection or the detection interval) may be set as the predetermined condition. ..

Further, although the detection sensor of the winning area is used as the detection means used for establishing the transition condition, other detection sensors may be used. For example, the touch sensor of the operation handle 24 or the set value change switch 151 may be usable. However, it is preferable that the transition condition includes detection by a detection unit that cannot be freely operated by the player during the game, such as a detection sensor in the winning area.

In addition, a plurality of DIP switches are provided at positions that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and are used as detection means used to establish the transition condition, and transition is made when the state of each DIP switch is a predetermined state. The condition may be satisfied. Further, a keyboard may be provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened and used as a detecting unit used to establish the transition condition, and the transition condition may be established by a password input from the keyboard. ..

Further, only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, it is possible to shift to the probability setting value changing state by monitoring the establishment of the transition condition, but the power of the gaming machine is turned on. At times, even if the set value change switch 151 is not turned on, it may be possible to monitor the establishment of the shift condition and shift to the probability set value change state. In this case, the period for always monitoring the establishment of the transition condition may be set based on the power-on of the gaming machine, or the transition condition may be set when the set value change switch 151 is operated after the power-on. It is also possible to start the period for monitoring the establishment of.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a player a game value Detection means used (gate switch 34a, winning a prize switch 35a,
The starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the special winning opening switch 38a) and the probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery of the game are assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), A setting means (game control device 100) is provided that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the setting value change button (setting value change switch 151), and the setting means is a mode predetermined by the detection means. If it is detected, the probability setting value can be selected. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means performs the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being illegally changed.
Further, the number of gaming machines that can simultaneously execute the probability setting value changing operation is not limited to the number of setting keys, and it is possible to perform the probability setting value changing operation on a plurality of gaming machines at the same time. Is improved.

Also, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, the game machine is capable of generating a special game state in which a game value is given to the player. A plurality of detecting means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, big winning opening switch 38a), and probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery of the game are assigned, Setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)) The setting means is adapted to enable the selection of the probability setting value when the plurality of detecting means detect the predetermined mode. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means performs the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being illegally changed. Further, the number of gaming machines that can simultaneously execute the probability setting value changing operation is not limited to the number of setting keys, and it is possible to perform the probability setting value changing operation on a plurality of gaming machines at the same time. Is improved.

The setting means enables the probability setting value to be selected when the detection means detects the predetermined mode in a certain period after the power is turned on. Therefore,
It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

In addition, the plurality of detection means cannot be operated by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed unintentionally.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment has the same configuration, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability setting value is changed by the setting value changing operation unit configured by the DIP switch.

The DIP switch forming the set value changing operation unit is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened, and the input state thereof is input to the CPU 111A. As shown in FIG. 41, three DIP switches SW1 to SW3 are provided as the set value change operation unit, and the state of the DIP switch corresponding to each probability set value is defined.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability set value changing process shown in FIG. 42 is performed instead of the probability set value changing process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value changing process, it is determined whether or not the state of the setting value changing operation unit has changed (step S461), and if it has changed (step S461), the value of the work probability setting value area is set to the corresponding value (Step S462). As a result, the desired probability setting value can be set by operating the setting value changing operation unit during the probability setting value changing state and ending the probability setting value changing state as a state corresponding to the desired probability setting value. Becomes

By using the DIP switch in this way, the work of setting a desired probability setting value becomes easy, and the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance. Since the set probability setting value can be grasped at a glance, the probability setting value display device 153
May not be provided. Further, a cover for covering the dip switch may be attachable so that the state of the dip switch is not immediately visible when the front frame 12 is opened.

Further, in order to make it easier to grasp the state of each DIP switch, a confirmation LED may be provided corresponding to each DIP switch and lighted when the corresponding DIP switch is ON. Further, the confirmation LED may be lit at all times, or may be lit only in the probability set value changing state or the probability set value confirmation mode.

Further, the set value changing operation unit is not limited to the DIP switch, but may be a toggle switch or a rotary type switch, as long as it is possible to grasp the probability set value by visually observing the state of each switch. Anything is fine.

Further, although the probability setting value change state is set according to the state of the setting key switch 152,
As in the third modified example described above, the probability setting value changing state may be changed depending on the state of the setting value changing switch 151, and the probability setting value changing state may be ended after a predetermined time elapses. In this case, the probability set value may be set based on the state of the set value changing operation unit when the predetermined time has elapsed, or based on the state of the set value changing operation unit at the time when the predetermined confirm operation is performed. The probability setting value may be set.

When the probability setting value change state is not set, the probability setting value currently set is compared with the state of the setting value change operation unit, and a monitoring process is performed to monitor whether the two states match. Is also good. The monitoring process may be always performed when the probability setting value is not changed, or may be performed only at a predetermined time such as when the power is turned on or when the special figure variation display game is started.
Alternatively, it may be periodically performed at regular intervals. When it is determined by the monitoring process that the two states do not match, it may be notified that an abnormality has occurred, or the game may be stopped.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. Basically, the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment has the same configuration, and hereinafter, the portions having the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. explain. The gaming machine of this modification has a setting key switch 152 and a CP for making the probability setting value changeable.
If the wiring between U111A and the U111A is broken, a game cannot be played.

In this modified example, a setting sub-board that serves as setting means including a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, and a probability setting value display device 153 is provided, and this setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100. It is like this. For example, as shown in FIG. 43A, the wiring from the setting key switch 152 provided on the setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100 via the connector 154.
Connected with. Note that the setting value change switch 151 is not shown here.

FIG. 43A shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is closed so that the input to the CPU 111A is LOW, and the input from the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the off state. Based on this, the probability setting value change state is prevented and the game is allowed to proceed. Further, in the gaming machine of the present modified example, an LED serving as a confirmation means for visually recognizing the state of the setting key switch 152 is provided. In the state of FIG. 14A, the confirmation means is turned off, and it can be confirmed that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the off state.

FIG. 43B shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is opened, and the input to the CPU 111A becomes HI, so that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be on.

As described above, when the power is turned on, the probability setting value change state is set on condition that the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position and the input from the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state. It is configured. That is, the input of the ON state from the setting key switch 152 forms the specific operation information input based on the operation of the operation unit to be in the specific state, and based on the input of the specific operation information. The state is changed to the probability setting value in which the probability setting value can be selected. In this probability setting value changing state, the game cannot be advanced, and the game can be advanced by ending the probability setting value changing state.

43C shows the case where the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A is broken, and FIG. 43D shows the case where the connector 154 is disconnected. CPU in any case
The input to 111A is set to HI, and the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized to be on.

That is, since the state becomes the same as when the probability setting value is changeable, the specific operation information is input also in this case. As a result, the probability setting value is changed and the game cannot be progressed. In this way, the specific operation information is input even in the case of disconnection or disconnection of the connector, so that it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in the case of abnormality.
Further, since the confirmation means is in a lighted state even when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position, it is possible to visually confirm that an abnormality has occurred.

Here, the example in which the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 are connected by the connector 154 has been described, but they may be directly connected without the connector 154. Further, the setting sub-board that constitutes the setting means including the setting key switch 152 and the like is the game control device 10.
Although it is provided separately from 0, the game control device 100 may be provided with a setting key switch 152 or the like and the setting means may be integrated with the game control device 100. In this case also, the setting is made by the same configuration. It is possible to detect disconnection between the key switch 152 and the CPU 111A or disconnection of the connector.

Further, here, the specific operation information is input when the connection between the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 is lost, but the specific operation is performed when the connection between the setting sub-board and the game control device 100 is lost. Information may be input. Alternatively, the setting sub-board may check the connection status of the setting key switch 152 and the like in the setting sub-board, and if there is an abnormality, the setting sub-board may output the specific operation information.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player A control unit (game control device 100) for controlling and a probability setting value, which is connected to the control unit and to which a probability value used for a lottery of the game is assigned, is set on the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)). A setting unit (game control device 100) that allows selection from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating a value change button (set value change switch 151)), and is operated so that the operation unit enters a specific state. Based on this, the specific operation information is input to the control means so that the probability setting value can be selected, and the control means does not advance the game while the specific operation information is input. When the wiring between the setting means and the control means is broken, the specific operation information is input to the control means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability setting value.

In addition, when the power is turned on while the operation unit is operated to be in a specific state, the probability setting value can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability setting value.

<Character appearance change>
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including each modified example of the first embodiment) is a decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device 41, and is a character of the decorative special symbol Z at the start of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to execute a character appearance variation (a decoration special figure variation display game in a character appearance variation mode) in which the image Z2 is erased and the character image Z2 of the decoration special symbol Z appears in the middle of the special figure variation display game.

The effect control device 300 executes the variable display effect of displaying the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game with the execution of the special figure variable display game. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 44A, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed on the decorative special figure variation display game display section 41a provided in the central portion of the display area of the display device 41.
The decorative special symbol Z displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas constituting the decorative special figure variable display game display section 41a is at least a numerical image (numeral pattern) as shown in FIG. 44(a), for example. ) Z1 and a character image (character pattern) Z2. Further, in the decorative special pattern Z, the character image Z2 can be erased while leaving the numeral image Z1.
The decorative special pattern Z may be at least a numerical image Z1 and a character image Z2. The decorative special pattern Z includes the numerical image Z1 and/or the character image Z2 in addition to the numerical image Z1 and the character image Z2. A frame image displayed behind the image Z2, a frame decoration image that decorates the frame image, a character decoration image that decorates the character image Z2 (for example, an image of a weapon or item that the character has), and a numeric image Z1. A highlighted image (for example, an effect image applied around numbers) or the like may be included.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 44(a), in addition to the decoration special map variation display game display portion 41a, a first standby hold display for displaying a decoration special drawing start memory display corresponding to the unfinished first start memory. Part 41
b1 and a second standby holding display portion 41b2 for displaying a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the undigested second start memory, and a start memory being used (corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed). A small symbol that is relatively smaller than the decoration special symbol (identification information) that is variably displayed on the decoration pending display variation display game display unit 41a that displays the information regarding the starting memory) is displayed. A small symbol variation display portion 41d and a number holding display portion 41e for displaying the number of undigested starting memories by numbers are provided.

There are two types of character appearance variation, character appearance variation A and character appearance variation B.
FIG. 44B shows an example of the flow of the character appearance variation A, and FIGS. 45 to 47 show an example of display on the display device 41 when the character appearance variation A is executed.
In the character appearance variation A, when the special figure variation display game starts (t11), an axis rotation display of the decoration special symbol Z that is stopped and displayed is performed (see FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b)). The character image Z2 of the special symbol Z is deleted.
Here, the axis rotation display is a “variable display mode in which the disk rotates about an axis along the radial direction”. That is, in the axis rotation display of the decorative special pattern Z, for example, the number image Z is displayed on the surface.
A decorative special design Z (hereinafter referred to as "character-containing design") including 1 and the character image Z2 is drawn, and a decorative special design Z (hereinafter referred to as "character-less design") that includes the numerical image Z1 but does not include the character image Z2 on the back surface ) Is displayed such that the virtual disk on which is drawn is rotated about the axis along the radial direction of the virtual disk.

In the axis rotation display when erasing the character image Z2 of the decorative special pattern Z, the virtual disk is rotated halfway and the surface of the virtual disk (the surface on which the character-containing pattern is drawn) is visible, After the state in which only the side surface of the disk is visible, the state is changed to the state in which the back surface of the virtual disk (the surface on which the non-character design is drawn) is visible. When only the side surface of the virtual disk becomes visible, the character image Z2 disappears, and thereafter, the character-less design is displayed.
In the present embodiment, in the axis rotation display when deleting the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z, the decorative special symbol Z (virtual disk) is half-rotated, and the character image Z2 is displayed during the axial rotation display. Although the deletion is performed, the rotation mode of the axis rotation display and the deletion timing of the character image Z2 can be appropriately changed. Specifically, for example, a decorative special pattern Z (virtual disk)
May be rotated by one or more rotations, or the character image Z2 may be deleted at the end of the rotation display.
Further, on the side surface of the virtual disk (side surface of the decorative special pattern Z), an image (character image, effect image, etc.) capable of suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit may be displayed. In this way, by displaying an image that cannot be understood unless the user pays attention, it is possible to raise the degree of attention of the decorative special symbol Z.

On the other hand, in the axial rotation display (described later) when the character image Z2 of the decorative special pattern Z appears, the virtual disk is rotated halfway and the back surface of the virtual disk (the surface on which the character-less pattern is drawn) is visible. The state is changed to a state in which only the side surface of the virtual disk is visible, and then the surface of the virtual disk (the surface on which the character-bearing pattern is drawn) is visible. When only the side surface of the virtual disk becomes visible, the character image Z2 appears, and thereafter, the character-presented pattern is displayed.
In the present embodiment, in the axis rotation display when the character image Z2 of the decoration special symbol Z appears, the decoration special symbol Z (virtual disk) is rotated by half, and the character image Z2 is displayed in the middle of the axis rotation display. Although it was made to appear, the rotation mode of the axis rotation display and the character image Z2
The appearance timing of can be changed appropriately. Specifically, for example, an axis rotation display in which the decorative special symbol Z (virtual disk) is rotated one rotation or more may be performed, or the character image Z2 may appear at the end of the axis rotation display.

Next, when the axis rotation display ends (t12), the variable display (scroll display) of the decorative special symbol Z starts (see FIG. 45(c)), and first, the decorative special symbol Z fluctuates at a speed that is difficult to identify. The high-speed variable display is displayed (see FIG. 46(a)).
Next, when the high-speed variable display is completed (t13), the low-speed variable display is displayed in which the decorative special symbol Z is variably displayed at a distinguishable speed (see FIG. 46(b)).
Next, when the low-speed fluctuation display ends (t14), a temporary stop display is displayed in which the decorative special symbol Z is rockably displayed at a fixed position (stop display position) (see FIG. 46(c)).

Next, in the middle of the temporary stop display, a concealed image Y (for example, an image imitating smoke) that conceals the decorative special symbol Z is displayed (see FIG. 47(a)). Since the concealed image Y gradually becomes thinner and disappears, the visibility behind the concealed image Y (the portion of the image displayed behind the concealed image Y that overlaps with the concealed image Y) is concealed. It gradually improves from a state where it is blocked by the image Y and cannot be seen at all, and eventually becomes equal to that before the concealed image Y is displayed. The display mode of the concealed image Y may be able to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit. Specifically, for example, a concealed image Y in the first display mode (for example, a black concealed image or a small concealed image) suggests that the expectation of the game is low, and the concealed image Y in the second display mode is indicated. (For example, a red concealed image or a larger concealed image) may be used to indicate that the degree of expectation of the game is high.
Next, when the concealed image Y becomes thin and the back of the concealed image Y (decorative special symbol Z or the like) becomes faint, the temporarily rotated display of the decorative special symbol Z is displayed in an axial rotation ( 47B), the character image Z2 of the decoration special symbol Z appears.

Then, when the axis rotation display is completed (t15), the decorative special symbol Z is stopped and displayed, and the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed (see FIG. 47(c)).
In the example shown in FIG. 44(b), the axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z is started before the hidden image Y disappears, but the invention is not limited to this. You may start the axis rotation display of the special symbol Z.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 44B, the axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z is finished after the hidden image Y disappears, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, at the same time when the hidden image Y disappears. The axis rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z may be ended.

FIG. 44C shows an example of the flow of the character appearance variation B, and FIGS. 45 and 48 show an example of display on the display device 41 when the character appearance variation B is executed.
In the character appearance variation B, when the special figure variation display game is started (t21), the rotation display of the decoration special symbol Z that is stopped is displayed (see FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b)). The character image Z2 of the special symbol Z is deleted.
Next, when the axis rotation display ends (t22), the variable display (scroll display) of the decorative special symbol Z starts (see FIG. 45(c)), and first, the decorative special symbol Z fluctuates at a speed that is difficult to identify. The high-speed variable display to be displayed is performed (see FIG. 48(a)).
Next, when the high-speed variable display is completed (t23), the low-speed variable display is performed in which the decorative special symbol Z is variably displayed at a distinguishable speed.

Next, the character image Z2 appears in the middle of the low speed variable display. Specifically, other than the decoration special symbol Z to be stopped and displayed, low-speed variable display is performed with no character, and the decoration special symbol Z to be stopped and displayed is slowly changed with a character-present symbol (see FIG. 48(b)). That is, when the decorative special symbol Z to be stopped and displayed is displayed on the decorative special symbol variable display game display section 41a, the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z is displayed.
Next, when the low-speed fluctuation display ends (t24), the temporary stop display for swinging and displaying the decorative special symbol Z at the fixed position (stop display position) is performed for a shorter period than the temporary stop display for the character appearance change A.
Then, when the temporary stop display ends (t25), the decorative special symbol Z is stopped and displayed, and the result of the special figure variable display game is displayed (see FIG. 48(c)).

As described above, in the character appearance variation B, the temporary stop display of the decorative special symbol Z is performed, but the period of the temporary appearance display in the character appearance variation B is shorter than the period of the temporary appearance display in the character appearance variation A.
In the character appearance variation A, the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z is displayed after the low-speed variation display is completed.
In the character appearance variation B, the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z appears in the middle of the low speed variation display. Since the period of the temporary stop display in the character appearance variation B is a short period, the effect when the character image Z2 appears during the temporary stop display (the effect of axially displaying the decorative special symbol Z and the hidden image Y are displayed). Cannot be performed). Therefore,
In the character appearance variation B, the character image Z2 of the decorative special pattern Z after the low-speed variation display is completed
When the character appears, the character image Z2 is suddenly displayed without such an effect being executed, so that the player suddenly feels strange that the character image Z2 is displayed, or the character image Z2 is suddenly displayed. The display may give a misunderstanding to the player that some information is notified. Therefore, in order to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or misunderstanding, in the character appearance variation B, the character image Z2 of the decorative special symbol Z appears in the middle of the low speed variation display.
In the character appearance variation B, the temporary decoration display of the decorative special symbol Z may not be performed.

When the variation time of the special figure variation display game is long (that is, when the execution time value of the special figure variation display game is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold), the effect control device 300, the decoration feature corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Character appearance variation A (character appearance variation performing a temporary stop display for a long time) can be executed as a figure variation display game. When the variation time of the special figure variation display game is short (that is, when the execution time value of the special figure variation display game is less than a predetermined threshold value), the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the particular figure variation display game is executed. As the character appearance variation B (character appearance variation performing temporary stop display for a short period) can be executed.
Note that the character appearance variation B may be executable even when the variation time is long, and the character appearance variation A may be executable even when the variation time is short. Specifically, for example, when the variation time of the special figure variation display game is long, the character appearance variation A (the character appearance variation performing the temporary stop display for a long period of time) is the character appearance variation B (the short term provisional variation). Character appearance change that displays stop)
Character selection variation B is easier to select and the variation time of the special figure variation display game is short
The (variation of appearance of characters performing temporary stop display for a short period) may be selected more easily than the variation of appearance of characters A (variation of appearance of characters performing temporary stop display for a long time).

It is also possible to make the selection rates of the character appearance variations A and B different according to the expectation of a big hit or the like. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot expectation is high, the character appearance variation B is configured to be easily selected, and the character image Z2 is displayed suddenly to notify that the jackpot expectation is high. Is.
Further, in the case of the character appearance variation A, it is possible to notify the expectation or the like of a big hit depending on the display mode of the concealed image Y, but in the character appearance variation B, the concealed image Y is not displayed. I can't. Therefore, in the case of the character appearance variation B, it is possible to configure not to give such a notification, or to give such a notification in a manner other than the display mode of the concealed image Y. For example, such notification may be performed depending on the display mode (size, color, etc.) of the character image Z2 that appears in the middle of the low speed variable display, or such notification may be performed by displaying the notification image. Good, speaker 19
Such notification may be performed by sound effects by a and 19b, or decoration effects by the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable display game is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game value is given to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state, a variable display game (decorative special figure) is performed by performing variable display and stop display of a symbol (decorative special symbol Z) in each of a plurality of variable display areas provided in the display device 41. The variation display game is provided with execution means (production control device 300), and the design is a design configuration including an identification image (numerical image Z1) and an erasable character image Z2. In the case of display, the display mode of the symbol can be converted into a low-speed fluctuation display mode in which the symbol can be identified and a high-speed fluctuation display mode in which the symbol is difficult to identify, and the symbol display mode can be changed at high speed. The variable display game (character appearance variation A) of the first variation mode in which the display mode is converted to the low-speed variation display mode, and then the stop display is performed via the temporary stop display mode, and the symbol display mode is changed to the high-speed variation display From the mode to the low-speed fluctuation display mode, and then
It is possible to execute the variable display game of the second variation mode (character appearance variation B) in which the stop display is performed after the temporary stop display mode of a shorter period than the first variation mode, and the variation of the first variation mode. In the display game, the character image Z2 is erased at the start of the variable display game, the high-speed variable display mode is executed with a pattern configuration (character-less pattern) that does not include the character image Z2, and the character image is displayed during execution of the temporary stop display mode. The result of the variable display game is displayed by causing Z2 to appear and performing a stop display in the symbol configuration (character-containing symbol) including the character image Z2. In the variable display game of the second variation mode, the variable display game of the variable display game is displayed. At the start, the character image Z2 is erased, the high-speed variable display mode is executed with a symbol composition (character-less pattern) that does not include the character image Z2, and the character image Z2 appears during execution of the low-speed variable display mode, and the character image Z2 is displayed. The result of the variable display game is displayed by performing a stop display with a symbol configuration (a symbol with a character) including.

Therefore, in the variable display game of the second variation mode (character appearance variation B), the character image Z2 appears during the low-speed variation display, not after the low-speed variation display ends, so that the player feels uncomfortable or has an excessive expectation. It is possible to avoid giving a game, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.
The identification image is not limited to the number image Z1 and may be a character image or a symbol image other than the number.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the executing means (effect control device 300), when the execution time value of the variable display game is equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value (when the variation time of the special figure variable display game is long). In the case where the variable display game (character appearance variation A) of the first variation mode is executed and the execution time value of the variable display game is less than a predetermined threshold value (when the variation time of the special figure variable display game is short), It can be configured to execute the variable display game (character appearance variation B) of the second variation mode.
With such a configuration, a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) having a different mode can be displayed according to the execution time value of the variable display game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the executing means (effect control device 300), when the character image Z2 is erased and when the character image Z2 appears, the design (decorative special design Z
) Is displayed by rotating the axis and at least one of displaying the concealed image Y on the design (decorative special design Z) is performed, and the identification image (numerical image Z1) included in the design is difficult to identify. It can be configured to transform into a difficult state.
With such a configuration, the character image Z2 can be erased and the character image Z2 can appear without a feeling of strangeness.

Here, in the present embodiment, the difficult-to-identify state in the axial rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z is
Only the side surface of the decorative special pattern Z (virtual disk) is visible. The difficult-to-identify state in displaying the concealed image Y is a state in which the concealed image Y is dark, that is, a state where the decorative special pattern Z is obscured by the concealed image Y and cannot be seen at all.
Note that, in the present embodiment, only the axial rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z is performed when the character image Z2 is erased, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the axial rotation display of the decorative special symbol Z when deleting the character image Z2. Alternatively (or alternatively), the hidden image Y may be displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, both the axial rotation display of the decoration special symbol Z and the display of the concealed image Y are performed when the character image Z2 appears, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration special symbol is displayed when the character image Z2 appears. Only one of the Z-axis rotation display and the hidden image Y display may be performed.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display) in which the identification information (decorative special symbol Z) is variably displayed in the variable display area on the display device 41 based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. In a gaming machine that is capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed and a stop display of the identification information results in a special result, the identification information is an identification image (numeric image). Z1) and a character image Z2, the character image Z2 is erased at the start of the variable display game, the variable display is performed without the character image Z2, and the temporary stop display before the stop display is being performed. Character image Z2 appears on the character image Z
A variable display game (character appearance variation A) of a first variation mode in which stop display is performed in a configuration including 2;
At the start of the variable display game, the character image Z2 is deleted and variable display is performed in a configuration not including the character image Z2. When the identification information is displayed in the variable display area, the character image Z2 appears and the character image Z2 is displayed. It is possible to execute the variable display game (character appearance variation B) of the second variation mode in which the stop display is performed with the configuration including.

Therefore, in the variable display game of the second variation mode (character appearance variation B), the character image Z2 appears during the variable display, not after the variable display ends, which gives the player a feeling of discomfort or excessive expectation. It is possible to prevent the game from being lost and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.
The identification image is not limited to the number image Z1 and may be a character image or a symbol image other than the number.

<Operation promotion production>
The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including each modified example of the first embodiment) can execute the operation promotion effect for promoting the operation of the effect button 25.
The game machine 10 of the present embodiment, as an operation promotion effect, an assembly effect that displays a moving image imitating completion of the effect button 25 from a plurality of parts before the operation effective period of the effect button 25,
The production button 25 displayed as a result of the assembly production during the operation valid period of the production button 25.
It is possible to execute an effect including a notification effect that displays the promotion image G1 including the button image G11 imitating the above and notifies that the operation to the effect button 25 can be accepted.

FIG. 49 shows an example of an exploded perspective view of the effect button 25.
For example, as shown in FIG. 49, the effect button 25 includes an outer lens 25a provided with a touch panel 29, a decoration member 25b, a decoration sheet 25c, an inner lens 25d, and a touch substrate 2.
5e, an LED substrate 25f, a reflector 25g, a spring 25h, a base 25i, and a plurality of screws 25j.

50 to 55 show examples of the display on the display device 41 when the operation promotion effect is executed.
As shown in, for example, FIG. 50(a), the effect control device 300 produces a variable display effect of displaying a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game as the special figure variable display game is executed. Execute. Then, at a predetermined timing, the effect control device 300 starts the assembly effect of the operation promotion effect.
In the assembly production, first, as shown in FIG. 50B, for example, a component image imitating a component constituting the production button 25 is displayed.

In the example shown here, among the component images simulating the components configuring the effect button 25, the component image simulating the touch substrate 25e and the component image simulating the screw 25j are omitted. In this way, by performing the assembly effect of assembling the effect button 25 from a plurality of parts in which some of the actual parts are omitted, the internal structure of the effect button 25 is not clarified even if the assembly effect is performed, so the effect button 25 It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against. That is, if the internal structure of the effect button 25 is clarified, there is a possibility of promoting an illegal act such as mischievous effect on the effect button 25. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect button 25 is displayed even if the assembly effect is performed.
Since the internal structure of is not clear, the assembly effect does not become a factor that promotes an illegal act with respect to the effect button 25. The parts omitted in the assembly production are not limited to the touch substrate 25e and the screw 25j, and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the LED board 25f is actually screwed to the reflector 25g, but in the example shown here, the parts image imitating the screw 25j is omitted, so that the LED board 25f is replaced with the inner lens 25d and the reflector 25g. It can appear as if it is sandwiched between and. In this way, by performing an assembly production in which some parts are assembled by an assembly method different from the actual assembly method and the production button 25 is assembled, the internal structure of the production button 25 is not clarified even if the assembly production is performed. It is possible to prevent cheating against 25. In addition,
In the assembly production, the assembly method that is different from the actual assembly method is not limited to different methods such as clamping and screwing, but may be different receiving parts (assembled parts), for example. That is, although the LED board 25f is actually mounted on the reflector 25g, the LED board 25f may be mounted on a component other than the reflector 25g in the assembly production. Further, the component (assembled component) to be assembled by an assembly method different from the actual assembly method in the assembly production is not limited to the LED board 25f and can be changed as appropriate.

In the assembly effect, the currently set probability setting value is suggested by the display mode of at least one of the plurality of component images. In the example shown here, the component image imitating the decorative sheet 25c is decorated with "V", and the color of the component image is white. The decoration "V" is a decoration that is not applied to the actual decoration sheet 25c.

FIG. 52C shows an example of a display mode corresponding to the currently set probability setting value. For example, as shown in FIG. 52C, when the component image imitating the decoration sheet 25c is decorated with "V" and the color of the component image is white, it corresponds to "setting 4". In the example shown here, it is suggested that the currently set probability setting value is “setting 4”.
The display mode corresponding to the currently set probability setting value is not limited to that shown in FIG. 52(c).
Further, it is also possible to suggest the currently set probability setting value by the display mode of the component image imitating the component other than the decorative sheet 25c.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50C, for example, the reflector 25g, the spring 25h, and the base 2
Step of combining 5i (specifically, for example, the spring 25h and the reflector 2 are attached to the base 25i.
A moving image imitating the step of assembling 5 g) is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 51A, for example, a step of combining the assembled component group, the LED substrate 25f, the inner lens 25d, and the decorative sheet 25c (specifically, for example, the reflector 2).
A moving image imitating the step of assembling the LED substrate 25f, the inner lens 25d, and the decorative sheet 25c on 5g is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 51B, for example, a moving image simulating the step of combining the assembled component group and the decorative member 25b (specifically, the step of assembling the decorative member 25b to the base 25i) is displayed. To be done.
Next, as shown in FIG. 51C, for example, the assembled component group and the outer lens 25a are combined (specifically, for example, the outer lens 25a is assembled to the reflector 25g) to complete the effect button 25. A video imitating the process is displayed. As a result, a button image G11 simulating the effect button 25 is displayed.

Next, when the operation effective period starts, the effect control device 300 starts the notification effect of the operation promotion effect, and displays the button image G11 and the remaining length of the operation effective period, for example, as shown in FIG. A promotion image G1 including a notification image G12 (for example, a time bar image) to be notified and an instruction image G13 (for example, a character image such as "press!" ..
Then, during the operation valid period, the effect button 2 is operated in the operation mode instructed by the instruction image G13.
When 5, is operated, the effect control device 300 starts the decoration special figure displayed on the first waiting holding display part 41b1 and the second waiting holding display part 41b2 as shown in FIG. 52(b), for example. A holding change effect (a type of prefetch effect) for notifying the result of the preliminary determination by changing the display mode of the target decorative special figure starting memory display of the memory display is performed.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the probability setting value currently set is suggested by the display mode of the component image among the display modes of the assembly production, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the component image is replaced (or In addition), it is also possible to suggest the probability setting value currently set by other modes.
For example, the probability setting value currently set may be suggested by the number of component images to be omitted, such that the smaller the number of component images to omit, the higher the probability setting value.
Further, for example, the probability setting value currently set may be suggested by a combination of colors and patterns of each component image.
Further, for example, a component image imitating the screw 25j may be displayed, and the probability setting value currently set may be suggested by the rotation direction or rotation speed of the component image. At that time, it is also possible to display an effect image (for example, an image of a spark that appears to be generated by rotation) for emphasizing the rotation.

Further, for example, the probability setting value may be suggested by the number of steps appearing in the assembly effect, such as the probability setting value being higher as the number of steps appearing in the assembly effect is higher. Specifically, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 50(c), the step of combining the base 25i and the spring 25h and the step of combining the reflector 25g are performed at the same time, but these steps should be performed separately. Therefore, the number of processes that appear during the assembly production increases. Also, for example, in FIG.
In the example shown in ), the step of combining the LED substrate 25f, the step of combining the inner lens 25d, and the step of combining the decorative sheet 25c are performed at the same time, but by performing these steps separately, an assembly effect is obtained. The number of processes that appear inside increases. In addition, for example, in FIG.
In the example shown in c), the step of incorporating the decorative member 25b and the step of incorporating the outer lens 25a are performed separately, but by performing these steps at the same time, the number of steps that appear during assembly production Is less.
Further, the display area of the display device 41 is divided into a plurality of small areas, an assembly effect of simultaneously performing a plurality of steps in one small area is executed, and each of the plurality of steps is separately performed in another small area. It is also possible to configure as follows. Specifically, the display area of the display device 41 is divided into a small area A and a small area B.
And a small area C (for example, the small area A is larger than the small area B and the small area C), and an assembly effect of simultaneously performing the first step and the second step in the small area A is executed. The first step may be performed in the small area B and the second step may be performed in the small area C. By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten the production time (the execution time of the assembly production) and display the details of the assembly method (although it is different from the actual assembly method), so that a realistic assembly production can be executed. It becomes possible to do.

Further, for example, the probability setting value is lower as the number of processes that do not satisfy the predetermined assembly order condition among the processes appearing in the assembly production is set, and is currently set by the assembly order of the production buttons 25 in the assembly production. A probability setting value may be suggested. Specifically, for example, when the predetermined assembly order condition is a condition of "parts are combined in order from the back", the assembly effect is shown in FIG.
(B)→FIG. 50(c)→FIG. 51(a)→FIG. 51(b)→... In other words, that is, when a process that does not satisfy the predetermined assembly order condition does not appear, and the assembly effect is shown in FIG. (B) → Fig. 5
3(a)→FIG. 51(a)→FIG. 51(b)→..., That is, when a process that does not satisfy the predetermined assembly order condition appears, the assembly order of the effect buttons 25 in the assembly production is shown. Is different.

Further, the probability setting value is higher as the protrusion amount of the outer lens 25a is larger, and the probability setting currently set is set by the protrusion amount of the outer lens 25a in the completed image (that is, the button image G11 simulating the effect button 25). You may suggest a value. Specifically, for example, in FIG.
51(c) is displayed after b), that is, the button image G11 in which the projection amount of the outer lens 25a is maximum is displayed, and FIG. 53(b) is displayed after FIG. 51(b). When the button image G11 with the smallest projection amount of the outer lens 25a is displayed,
The protruding amount of the outer lens 25a in the completed image is different.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the internal structure of the effect button 25 from being clarified, that is, in order to conceal the accurate internal structure of the effect button 25, a plurality of parts in which some of the actual parts are omitted are omitted. The assembly button is assembled by assembling some parts by an assembly method different from the actual assembly method. That is, the assembly production is performed in the production mode in which some of the parts are omitted and the production mode in which the assembly method is different. However, even if the assembly production is performed in any one of these production modes, The exact internal structure of the effect button 25 can be kept secret. Therefore, the assembly effect may be performed in any one of these effect modes. In addition to these production modes (or in place of some or all of these production modes), by assembling production in other production modes, the accurate internal structure of the production button 25 is hidden. Is possible.

For example, an assembly effect of assembling the effect button 25 from a plurality of parts including parts that are different from the actual parts may be executed. That is, as another effect mode, an effect mode in which the parts are different may be performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53C, for example, a component image simulating a component that is not actually incorporated is displayed between the component image simulating the reflector 25g and the component image simulating the spring 25h. As a result, the internal structure of the effect button 25 can be prevented from becoming clear.
Further, for example, an assembly effect of assembling the effect button 25 by adding extra parts may be executed. That is, as another effect mode, an effect mode in which extra parts are added may be performed. Specifically, for example, a larger number of component images that represent actual components (for example, substrate-based components (inner lens 25d, touch substrate 25e, LED substrate 25f), screws 25j, and the like) than the actual number are displayed. As a result, the internal structure of the effect button 25 can be prevented from becoming clear. Furthermore, in this case, since the number of steps in the assembly production can be increased, various setting suggestions can be made, and the assembly production can be excited.
Further, for example, an assembly effect of assembling the effect button 25 may be executed by omitting a part of the actual process. That is, as another effect mode, an effect mode in which some steps are omitted may be performed. Specifically, for example, in the present embodiment, the assembly effect is started from FIG. 50(b), that is, in a state where all the component images are disassembled, but FIG. 50(c), FIG. 51(a), and FIG. It is possible to prevent the internal structure of the effect button 25 from being clarified by starting the assembling effect from 51(b), that is, in a state in which part of the component images are united. For example, when the assembly effect is started from FIG. 50(c), the step of combining the reflector 25g, the spring 25h, and the base 25i is omitted, so that the internal structure of the effect button 25 is not clarified.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 52B, when the effect button 25 is operated in the operation mode instructed by the instruction image G13 during the operation valid period, the hold change effect is executed. However, the effect executed when the effect button 25 is operated in the operation mode instructed by the instruction image G13 during the operation valid period is not limited to the hold change effect and can be appropriately changed.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, for example, when the effect button 25 is operated in the operation mode instructed by the instruction image G13 during the operation valid period, the decoration that is variably displayed in the decoration special figure variable display game is displayed. A special symbol may be temporarily stopped (or stopped) to perform a symbol stop effect. In the example shown in FIG. 54, the decorative special symbol is temporarily stopped in all of the left, middle, and right variable display areas forming the decorative special figure variable display game display section 41a, but in the symbol stop effect, The decorative special symbol may be temporarily stopped (or stopped) in at least one variable display area among the left, center, and right variable display areas. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 54, a character-less pattern (decorative special pattern including a numerical image but not a character image) is temporarily displayed, but a character-present pattern (decorative special pattern including a numerical image and a character image) ) Can be temporarily displayed.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 55, when the effect button 25 is operated in the operation mode instructed by the instruction image G13 during the operation valid period, a temporary stop display (or stop display) is displayed in the decorative special figure variable display game. There is a normal symbol (decorative special symbol that constitutes a special result mode in which the probability variation state does not occur after the end of the special game state) It is also possible to perform a symbol promotion effect of promoting to (pattern). In the example shown in FIG. 55, in all of the left, middle, and right variable display regions forming the decorative special figure variable display game display portion 41a, the normal symbols temporarily displayed are changed to the probability variable symbols. However, in the symbol promotion effect, the normal symbol that is temporarily stopped (or stopped) in at least one variable display area among the left, middle, and right variable display areas may be changed to a probability variation symbol.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, a game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, the player has a gaming value. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which is given, a player can operate a production operation means (production button 25) composed of a plurality of members, and a production control means (production) for controlling the production of the game. Control device 300), and the production control means can execute a promotion production (operation promotion production) that promotes the operation of the production operation means. Assembling effects that display a series of effects (in the case of the present embodiment, moving images) that imitate the completion of the effect operating means by the members (parts), and the result of the assembly effect during the effective operation period of the effect operating means. Notification production for displaying that the promotion image G1 including the operation means image (button image G11) imitating the effect operation means displayed as is displayed to inform that the operation to the effect operation means can be accepted. The predetermined information can be suggested by the production mode of the assembly production.
Therefore, since a novel promotion effect (operation promotion effect) can be executed, the interest of the promotion effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, a setting means capable of setting one probability setting value among a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability values used for the lottery of the game (special figure variation display game) are assigned ( The game control device 100) may be provided so that the probability setting value set by the setting means as the predetermined information can be suggested according to the production mode of the assembly production (
See FIG. 52(c)).
With this configuration, the probability setting value can be suggested according to the production mode of the assembly production, so that the interest of the promotion production (operation promotion production) can be enhanced.
Note that the predetermined information, that is, the information suggested by the production mode of the assembly production, is not limited to the probability setting value and can be changed as appropriate. Is also good.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the assembly effect is effect operation means (effect button 2
5) is a series of productions in which component member images (component images) that imitate the members (components) that make up (5) are assembled in a predetermined order, and the display mode of a part of the component member images in the assembly production is a specific display mode (
For example, by changing to a mode in which the decoration is "exciting heat", it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the result of the game will be a special result as the predetermined information.
With such a configuration, the degree of expectation of a big hit can be suggested by the production mode of the assembly production, so that the interest of the promotion production (operation promotion production) can be enhanced.
It should be noted that the predetermined information, that is, the information suggested by the production mode of the assembly production, is not limited to the expectation degree of being a big hit, and can be changed as appropriate, for example, the probability setting value or the expectation degree of reach occurrence. Is also good.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the assembly effect is effect operation means (effect button 2
5) is a series of effects for synthesizing component member images (component images) simulating the members (components) that make up (5) in a predetermined order, and a display mode of a part of the component member images in the assembly effect is a specific display mode (for example, It is possible to configure such that the degree of expectation that the result of the game will be a special result can be suggested as the predetermined information by changing to a mode in which the decoration is "heated!".
With such a configuration, the degree of expectation of a big hit can be suggested by the production mode of the assembly production, so that the interest of the promotion production (operation promotion production) can be enhanced.
It should be noted that the predetermined information, that is, the information suggested by the production mode of the assembly production, is not limited to the expectation degree of being a big hit, and can be changed as appropriate, for example, the probability setting value or the expectation degree of reach occurrence. Is also good.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the assembly performance, some parts can be assembled by an assembly method different from the actual assembly method to assemble the production operation means (production button 25).
With this configuration, even if the assembly production is performed, the production operation means (the production button 25
Since the internal structure of) is not clarified, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the rendering operation means.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the assembly production, the production operation means (production button 25) can be assembled from a plurality of parts including parts different from actual parts.
With this configuration, even if the assembly production is performed, the production operation means (the production button 25
Since the internal structure of) is not clarified, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the rendering operation means.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the assembly production, part of the actual process can be omitted and the production operation means (production button 25) can be assembled.
With this configuration, even if the assembly production is performed, the production operation means (the production button 25
Since the internal structure of) is not clarified, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the rendering operation means.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the assembly effect, the effect operation means (effect button 25) can be configured from a plurality of parts in which some of the actual parts are omitted.
With this configuration, even if the assembly production is performed, the production operation means (the production button 25
Since the internal structure of) is not clarified, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the rendering operation means.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the promotion image G1 is an operation means image (button image G11) and an effective period notification image (announcement image G12) for informing information on the operation effective period.
) And an operation mode instruction image (instruction image G13) for instructing the operation mode of the effect operation means (effect button 25) (see FIG. 52(a)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a promotion effect with high appeal (operation promotion effect), that is, a promotion effect that effectively enhances the player's motivation for operation.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300),
When the effect operation means (effect button 25) is operated during the operation valid period, the start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display) corresponding to the start memory that is the right to execute the game (special figure variation display game) is displayed. The effect of changing the display mode (holding change effect) can be configured to be executable (see FIG. 52(b)).
With such a configuration, an attractive privilege (holding change effect) is given by operating the effect operation means (effect button 25), and thus promotion effect (operation promotion effect)
The effect of can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300),
The identification information (decorative special symbol) is variably displayed in each of a plurality of variable display areas provided on the display device 41 to execute the game (decorative special symbol variable display game), and the operation means ( When the effect button 25) is operated, it is possible to perform an effect (symbol stop effect) in which the identification information is temporarily stopped or stopped in at least one of the plurality of variable display areas. (See Figure 54).
With this configuration, an attractive privilege (symbol stop effect) is given by operating the effect operation means (effect button 25), and thus promotion effect (operation promotion effect)
The effect of can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300),
The identification information (decorative special symbol) is variably displayed in each of a plurality of variable display areas provided on the display device 41 to execute the game (decorative special symbol variable display game), and the operation means ( When the production button 25) is operated, the production (design promotion) in which the identification information (normal design) temporarily displayed or stopped in the variable display area is changed to identification information (probability variation design) that is more advantageous to the player The effect can be configured to be executable (see FIG. 55).
With this configuration, an attractive privilege (design promotion effect) is given by operating the effect operation means (effect button 25), and thus promotion effect (operation promotion effect)
The effect of can be enhanced.

It should be noted that, in the assembly production, among the components constituting the production button 25, those which are difficult for the player to understand and those which cannot be visually recognized (or are difficult to visually recognize) may be put together into virtual components. For example, a combination of board-based components (inner lens 25d, touch substrate 25e, LED substrate 25f) may be replaced with virtual components. This makes it possible to reduce the production time and prevent fraudulent acts.
Further, the probability setting value and the jackpot expectation degree may be suggested according to the display mode of the virtual parts. For example, the big hit expectation degree may be suggested/informed by the color of the virtual part (for example, the expectation degree is high in the order of red>green>yellow>blue>white). In addition, setting suggestion (probability setting value suggestion) may be performed by the shape and exterior of the virtual part.

Further, the part image imitating the part forming the effect button 25 does not have to be an image in which the actual part is realistically reproduced, but may be an image in which the actual part is deformed. For example, the screws do not have to reproduce the screw threads one by one, the number of LEDs on the LED substrate 25f does not have to be completely reproduced, and the decorative member 25b having a complicated shape, the reflector 25g, and the like. The base 25i and the like do not have to be completely reproduced. That is, the part image may be similar to the actual part.
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the assembly effect of the completed pattern in which the effect buttons 25 are completely assembled is illustrated, but there may be an incomplete pattern assembly effect in which the effect buttons 25 are not assembled properly. Although the notification effect of displaying the promotion image G1 is executed after the assembly effect of the completed pattern, the notification effect of displaying the promotion image G1 may not be executed after the assembly effect of the incomplete pattern. In this case, it is possible to notify that the effect that requires the operation of the effect button 25 is not executed by the assembly effect of the incomplete pattern. In the unfinished pattern assembling effect, for example, in FIG. 51B (when the button image G11 is completed by assembling one more item), the outer lens 25a does not fit well and fails. be able to.

In addition, since the player may misunderstand that the button image G11 is completed (the operation valid period has started) during the assembly production (for example, from around FIG. 51B), the operation is performed. It may be notified before the valid period that the operation is not valid.
Specifically, for example, a notification image G12 (for example, a time bar image) that notifies the remaining length of the operation valid period is displayed at the same time as the start of the assembly production, and the notification image G12 is not changed during the assembly production ( (For example, do not change the contents of the time bar as empty (or full))
By doing so, it is possible to notify the player that the operation is before the effective period.
Alternatively, the notification image G12 is displayed at the same time as the start of the assembly effect, and the notification image G12 notifies the remaining length of the execution time of the assembly effect in a mode different from the notification mode in which the remaining length of the operation effective period is notified. It is also possible to do so. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that the operation is before the effective period, and also to notify the time when the assembly effect is executed, that is, the time until the operation effective period starts. When the notification mode for notifying the remaining length of the operation valid period is a mode for reducing the time bar, a mode different from the notification mode for notifying the remaining length of the operation valid period (that is, the remaining execution time of the assembly effect) As an example of the notification mode for notifying the length, a mode of counting down the time can be mentioned.

Further, an integrated image in which a component image simulating the decorative member 25b (may be another component image) and a notification image G12 for notifying the remaining length of the operation effective period may be displayed. At that time, before the operation valid period, the integrated image is displayed in a display mode (for example, an empty (or full) time bar and a dark color) notifying that the operation is not valid, and the integrated image is displayed during the operation valid period. The converted image may be displayed in a display mode (for example, time bar decrease and bright color) for notifying that the operation period is valid.

Further, in the assembly production, some of the parts are omitted, extra parts are added, the display mode of the part image is the setting suggestion mode, virtual parts are displayed, and virtual parts are displayed. In the case where the display mode is the expectation degree suggesting mode or the like, it is possible that the player misses it. You may notify.
Further, in the assembly effect, not only the state in which the button image G11 is gradually completed from only one direction is displayed, but also the state in which the button image G11 is assembled from another direction at a predetermined timing may be displayed. For example, after displaying FIG. 51(b), the orientation of the assembled component group and the outer lens 25a is changed (changed to the orientation in which the outer lens 25a is arranged above the assembled component group), and then the merged A moving image simulating the process of completing the effect button 25 by combining the already-completed parts group and the outer lens 25a may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to display an image in which the player assembles from a direction close to the direction in which the player views the effect button 25.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals.

FIG. 56 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment. On the surface of the game board 30, the outer peripheral wall 3
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by 1 is formed. The game area 32 is configured by being surrounded by a resin side case 33 and an outer peripheral wall 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. Further, on the left side of the game area 32, there is provided a guide wall 31b which is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 and forms a guide path 31a for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32.

In the game area 32, a center case (game production structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 is disposed in the substantially center. The display device 41 is mounted in a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent the game balls from jumping in from the peripheral game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area where the image on the display screen can be displayed (display area), a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols) and information relating to the game such as a character that directs the special figure variable display game and a background image that enhances the effect are displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is played. Further, on the display screen, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed. Further, the center case 40 is provided with a board production device 44 that produces an effect by playing. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 56 toward the center of the display device 41.

Below the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a start condition of the first special drawing changing display game (special drawing 1 changing display game) is provided.
The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, on the left side of the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that receives a game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 40 and forms a warp flow path that guides it to the stage part 620 is attached. ing. The warp flow path forming member 614 is the front and rear width of the game area 32 (the cover glass (transparent member) 1 covering the front of the game board body 80 to the front of the game board 30).
4 to the rear surface).

The warp flow path formed by the warp flow path forming member 614 is a cylindrical flow path having an inner diameter that allows the game balls to flow in a row, and opens toward the game area 32 on the left side of the center case 40. It is possible to receive a game ball flowing down in the game area 32. This upstream end portion forms the inlet of the warp flow path. Furthermore, the warp flow path is an L-shaped flow path that guides the game ball that has flowed in from the upstream end to the lower right and then to the rear. Then, the downstream side end portion is opened rearward so as to guide the game ball to the left end portion of the stage portion 620.

In the stage part 620, a game ball can roll forward, backward, leftward and rightward, and both left and right sides are inclined surfaces that are lowered toward the center. It is formed in a W shape. The central portion of the stage portion 620 projects upward, but is lower than the left and right ends. Game balls that have passed through the warp flow path flow into the stage portion 620 from the left end and roll along the left-right direction. Further, the game ball that has bounced under the stage portion 620 can also flow in.

In this substantially W-shaped stage portion 620, an inclined surface that descends forward is formed at the lowest portion located on both sides of the central portion that projects upward. Due to this inclined surface, the game ball whose flow force is weakened on the stage part 620 is guided from the front end of the stage part 620 to the game area 32 below.

Further, in the substantially W-shaped stage portion 620, a groove-shaped flow-down path that extends along the front-rear direction and descends forward is formed at the apex of the central portion that projects upward. Has been done. This downflow path is a shallow groove, and many game balls roll left and right without fitting in the groove. The game ball fitted in the flow-down path is guided forward, falls right above the first starting winning opening 36, and flows into the first starting winning opening 36 with a high probability.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 that gives a starting condition of the universal figure changing display game is provided. The gaming ball that has won the universal figure starting gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, on the lower right side of the center case 40, an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a starting condition of the second special figure changing display game is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b that is opened by turning in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the left and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. The movable member 37b is normally provided. It is almost vertical and holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the game ball cannot flow. Then, when the result of the universal figure changing display game is a predetermined stop display mode, the upper end side is tilted leftward as shown in FIG. 56 by the universal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. It is adapted to be rotated to be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game balls easily flow into the normal variation winning device 37. The game ball that has won the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be allowed to win even in the closed state, and may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state.

Two general winning openings 35 are provided on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32.
Is arranged, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged above the normal variable winning device 37.
The game balls that have won the general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

In the lower right part of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variation winning device capable of converting a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted (
A special winning opening) 38 is provided. The special variation winning device 38 includes a special winning opening that opens upward, and an opening/closing member that can open and close the opening of the special winning opening. The upper part of the opening/closing member is a flow path 38d through which the game ball can flow down by forming the bottom surface of the opening/closing member, and the game ball can flow down to the left.

The opening/closing member normally holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) that closes the special winning opening. In this closed state, the game ball flowing down the flow path 38d passes above the special winning opening and flows down to the left of the special variation winning device 38. When the result of the special figure variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode and the special game state is reached, the opening/closing member is moved from the flow path 38d by the special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. The game ball that has retreated and flowed into the flow path 38d is changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which it can flow into the special winning opening. Inside the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

Further, an information display device 630 that displays information regarding the special figure variation display game is provided in the lower right portion of the center case 40. This information display device 630 has a first information display section that displays the number of first starting memories that are the execution right of the first special figure variation display game, and a second starting memory that is the execution right of the second special figure variation display game. A second information display section for displaying the number of Further, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the first special figure variable display game is displayed by the fourth symbol separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the display device 41 by the first to third symbols. Separately from the decoration special figure variation display game displayed by the first to third symbols on the third information display unit or the display device 41, the decoration special figure 2 variation corresponding to the second special figure variation display game by the fourth symbol A fourth information display unit for displaying the display game is provided.

The first information display section and the second information display section are each composed of two light emitting members, and the third information display section and the fourth information display section are each composed of one light emitting member. The information display device 630 is provided with these six light emitting members. Further, the information display device 630 is provided with a design that is integrated with the surrounding design.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game area 32 in which the game balls flow down, the area on the left side of the center case 40 is the left side game area, and the area on the right side of the center case 40 is the right side game area. ing. Then, the player can aim the winning at the first starting winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 by adjusting the launching force to shoot the game ball to the left playing area (so-called left hitting), and the right playing area. By launching a game ball (so-called right-handed hitting) to the universal figure starting gate 34
It is possible to aim for a prize to the normal variable winning device 37, the special variable winning device 38, and the general winning opening 35.

On the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game, and the universal figure starting gate 34, which form the special figure variable display game, are won. A collective display device 50 for displaying a general-purpose variable display game as a trigger and various information is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like.
A special display 1 display (first special display fluctuation display section) 51 for the variable display game, a special figure 2 display (second special display fluctuation display section) 52 for the special display 2 variable display game, and an LED lamp Various display devices are provided. The various display devices include a special figure 1 hold indicator for informing the starting memory number of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a special figure 2 hold indicator for informing of the starting memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game. .. In addition, a round display section that displays the number of rounds (the number of times the special variation winning device has been opened and closed) at the time of a big hit, a first game state display section that informs whether it is in a time saving state (during normal power support, a specific game state), left A second game state display unit is included that informs the player of the beating (normal hitting) and the right hitting, which is advantageous to the player (how to hit according to the gaming state). In addition, a third gaming state display unit (third gaming state display unit, probability state display unit) that displays that the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, a universal figure variation display game Includes a universal figure indicator for use and a universal figure hold indicator for informing the number of starting memories of the universal figure variation display game.

In the special figure 1 display device 51, during the change time of the first special figure changing display game, the special figure 1 changing display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. Then, when the variation time of the first special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the first special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 1 changing display and the lighting pattern displayed as a result form form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the first special figure changing display game.

In the special figure 2 display device 52, during the change time of the second special figure changing display game, the special figure 2 changing display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. Then, when the variation time of the second special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the second special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 2 changing display and the lighting pattern displayed as a result mode form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the second special figure changing display game.

The public figure display repeatedly displays a general figure changing display that displays a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order during the change time of the general figure changing display game. And
When the variation time of the universal figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result form) corresponding to the result of the universal figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the general figure changing display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result mode form identification information (general figure, normal pattern) for displaying the general figure changing display game.

The special figure 1 hold indicator displays the number of the first starting memory (first hold number) which is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game by turning off, blinking and turning on the plurality of light emitting units. The special figure 2 hold indicator displays the number of second starting memories (second hold number), which is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game, by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of light emitting units. The public figure hold indicator displays the number of public figure start memories (the number of public figure hold numbers) that is the right to execute the general figure variable display game by turning off, blinking, and lighting a plurality of light emitting units.

The round display unit turns off all the light emitting units when the special game state is not in progress, and makes the lighting mode corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. The first gaming state display unit (time saving state notification unit) turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state where the time saving state does not occur (when the variable time reduction function is not activated), and the time saving state occurs. If so (when the fluctuation time reduction function is activated), turn on the lamp. The second gaming state display unit (right-handling notification unit) 57 turns off the lamp in a gaming state in which left-handing is more advantageous to the player than right-handing (normal hitting), and is more effective than left-handing. When the player is in a gaming state in which the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player (when the player is right-handed, the lamp is turned on. When the power is turned on, the third gaming state display unit turns on the LED when it is in the high probability state, and turns off the LED when not in the high probability state.

Next, details of the game board 30 in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 57, the game board 30 includes a game board main body 80 having a substantially rectangular plate shape, a front component member 600 that constitutes a front side portion of the center case 40, and a rear side portion of the center case 40 and the game board. A rear component 700 to which various necessary members are attached.

The front component 600 is attached by being fitted from the front side into an opening formed in the game board main body 80 and penetrating in the front and rear. The front component has an annular base member 610, and various members such as a warp flow path forming member 614 and an information display device 630 are attached to the base member 610. The base member 610 is formed with a screw hole, a screwing portion, a boss for positioning, a recess for receiving the boss, a slit for receiving a rib, and the like, so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions on the base member 610. In addition, the front component 600 can be fixed at an appropriate position with respect to the game board body.

A regulation wall 613 is provided on the front surface of the base member 610 except for the portion where the stage portion 620 and the warp flow path forming member 614 are arranged. The regulation wall 613 is a front and rear width of the game area 32 (a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front of the game board body 80 to the front of the game board 30).
The width up to the back side of) is extended to the front. As a result, the game balls flowing down the game area 32 are restricted from flowing into the center case 40, the visibility of the display device 41 is secured, and the number of game balls flowing into the stage section 620 is restricted. There is.

The rear component 700 that constitutes the back surface side of the game board body 80 is a recess 711 that is open to the front.
Has a substantially rectangular box-shaped rear base member 710 having screw holes, screwing portions, positioning bosses, recesses for receiving bosses, slits for receiving ribs, and the like. Therefore, various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. Further, at the front end of the rear base member 710, a brim-shaped fixing portion 713 that extends outwardly perpendicularly to the side wall 712 is formed, and the rear component member 700 is provided on the rear surface of the game board main body 80 in a predetermined manner. It can be fixed in position. Further, the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 is formed with a through hole 715 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The through hole 715 allows the display surface of the display device 41 attached behind the rear base member 710 to be visually recognized.

The display device 41 attached to the back surface of the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 includes a liquid crystal display device having a display surface capable of covering the entire through hole 715 formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710. There is. The display device 41 is attached so that the display surface is on the front side, so that the image on the display surface can be viewed from the front of the game board 30 through the through hole 715 formed in the rear base member 710. Has been done. The display device 41 is not limited to one including a liquid crystal display device, and may be one including a display such as an EL or CRT, for example.

Inside the recess 711 of the rear base member 710, a discharge flow path unit 720 having a discharge ball for a game ball that has won a prize in each winning opening and having a detection sensor for the game ball, a plurality of board effect devices 44, and a board. A decoration device 46 is provided. As the plurality of board effect devices 44, an upper movable decorative unit 210 and a lower movable decorative unit 510, which are movable effect devices that perform the effect of the game by operating, are provided.

As shown in FIG. 58, the upper movable decoration unit 210 is arranged above the display area of the display device 41, and can move up and down from the initial state shown in FIG. 56 as shown in FIG. 58(a).
An upper movable member 230 and a second upper movable member 219 that is rotatable from the initial state shown in FIG. 56 as shown in FIG. 58B are provided.

Returning to FIG. 57, the upper movable decoration unit 210 includes a base member 211 attached to the rear base member 710. The base member 211 is U-shaped when viewed from the front surface side, and includes an upper base portion 212 arranged above the display area and a left base portion 213 arranged leftward when viewed from the front surface side of the display area. , And a right base portion 214 arranged on the right side when viewed from the front side of the display area.

At the right end of the left base portion 213 and the left end of the right base portion 214, a guide portion 215 extending in the up-down direction is provided. The guide portion 215 guides the first upper movable member 230 along the vertical direction. In addition, the left base portion 213 and the right base portion 214,
A drive mechanism 216 for vertically moving the first upper movable member 230 is provided. Each drive mechanism 216 has a motor as a drive source, and the link member 217 is driven by driving the motor.
Is operated to drive the first upper movable member 230 up and down.

The link members 217 are rotatably attached to the left base portion 213 and the right base portion 214, respectively, and are arranged so as to extend in directions opposite to each other. The link member 217 has a rotation shaft whose one end extends forward along the front-rear direction provided on the left base portion 213 or a rotation end which extends forward along the front-rear direction provided on the right base portion 214. It is rotatably supported by a moving shaft. Further, the other end of the link member 217 is slidably connected to a connecting portion 222 provided on a mounting member 239 mounted on the unit base portion 221 (see FIG. 59) to which the first upper movable member 230 is mounted. .. Although not shown here, the second upper movable member 219 shown in FIG. 58B is attached to the front surface of the link member 217 so as to cover the front side of the link member 217.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), the unit base portion 221 is a plate-shaped portion extending left and right, and the first upper movable member 230 is attached to the central portion. On the left and right of the unit base portion where the first upper movable member 230 is attached, connection portions 222 that connect the link members are provided. The connecting portion 222 is an elongated hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction,
The end portion of the link member 217 is slidably connected to the connecting portion 222, and the unit base portion 221 moves up and down according to the operation of the link member 217 based on the driving of the motor. Further, guided portions 223 that are guided by the guide portions 215 provided on the left base portion 213 and the right base portion 214 are provided at the left and right ends of the unit base portion 221.

As shown in FIG. 60, the first upper movable member 230 includes a light emitting unit 240 attached to the unit base portion 221. The light emitting unit 240 includes a light emitting decoration portion 256 that performs decoration by light. Further, a drive mechanism for driving the covering member 248 provided in the light emission decoration portion 256 is provided above the light emitting unit 240, and the upper cover member 255 is attached so as to cover the upper portion of the drive mechanism. In addition, the light emitting unit 240 is provided with a cover member 231 that covers the outer periphery of the light emitting decoration 256. The cover member 231 is made of a material that can transmit light.

An inner decoration member 232 and an outer decoration member 233 are arranged on the front side of the light emitting unit 240. As shown in FIG. 61A, the inner decoration member 232 is provided with a through hole 232a at a portion facing the light emission decoration portion 256, and as shown in FIG. 61B, the light emission decoration portion 25 is provided through the through hole 232a.
6 is visible. Further, the outer decoration member 233 is arranged on the front side of the inner decoration member 232 and is decorated to surround the through hole 232a.

Returning to FIG. 60, a reflector 235 that reflects light forward is disposed behind the light emitting unit 240. Through holes 235 a are provided in the reflector 235 at positions on the left and right rear sides of the light emission decoration portion 256. Behind the through hole 235a, a substrate lens 236 which is a lens member capable of transmitting light is attached so as to close the through hole 235a.
Behind 36, an LED board 237 having a plurality of LEDs arranged on the front surface is arranged. Also, LE
A substrate cover 238 is attached to the rear of the D substrate 237.

Further, a reflector lens 234, which is a lens member capable of transmitting light, is attached in front of the through hole 235a. The reflector lens 234 has a function of collecting light from the LED substrate 237 to the covering member 248 side (center of the light emitting unit 240). This gives L
It is possible to decorate the light emitting decoration 256 from the rear side surface by the light from the ED.
Further, the reflector lens 234 is an LED of the light emitting section 250 provided in the light emitting decoration section 256.
The light from the substrate 250b (see FIG. 62) is reflected to assist the decoration by the light emission of the light emission decoration portion 256. Further, the reflector lens 234 includes the LED substrate 237 and the LED substrate 25.
By transmitting a part of the light from 0b and irradiating it to the reflector 235 and the interior decoration member 232 arranged around, the light is scattered inside the light emitting unit 240 and the decoration by the light is efficient. It has the function to be performed frequently.

Further, the first upper movable member 230 is provided at the rear of the reflector 235 with the unit base portion 221.
A mounting member 239 for mounting on the front surface of the. The reflector 235 and the light emitting unit 240 are attached to the front side of the attachment member 239. Also,
The attachment member 239 is provided with a connection portion 222 to which a link member 217 for vertically moving the first upper movable member 230 is slidably connected.

As shown in FIG. 62, the light emitting unit 240 includes a motor 241 that serves as a drive source and a motor 24.
A motor cover 242 that covers 1 is provided. The drive shaft 241a of the motor 241 is arranged so as to extend upward along the vertical direction, and the drive gear 243 is attached to the drive shaft 241a. The driving gear 243 can transmit the driving force to the ring gear 245 via the driven gear 244. A bearing member 254 for axially supporting the driven gear 244 is arranged below the driven gear 244.

A support member 246 that rotatably supports the ring gear is fitted to the inner peripheral portion of the ring gear 245. The support member 246 is fixed to the upper cover member 255 via a support shaft 249 inserted in the center. Further, a rotating portion 247 to which the covering member 248 is attached is attached to the ring gear 245, and as the ring gear 245 rotates, the rotating portion 247 and the covering member 248 attached to the rotating portion 247 move in the vertical direction. It is designed to rotate about an axis along the.

A through hole 247a is formed at the center of the rotating portion 247 so as to vertically penetrate therethrough.
The support shaft 249 vertically penetrates a. The light emitting unit 250 is attached to the support shaft 249 penetrating below the through hole 247a. The light emitting unit 250 includes a decorative lens member 250a that is a lens member that can transmit light, and an LED substrate 250b having a plurality of LEDs arranged on the front surface is attached to the rear surface side of the decorative lens member 250a.

As shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), in the light-emission decoration part 256 including the light emitting part 250 and the covering member 248 as shown in FIG. 59, the covering member 248 rotates around the light emitting part 250. In addition, the light emitting unit 250 is changed to a covered state invisible from the front and a retracted state in which the light emitting unit 250 is visible from the front as shown in FIGS. 59(c) and (d). It is possible.

Most of the covering member 248 is made of a material that does not transmit light, but a light transmitting portion 248a that is capable of transmitting light is provided along the border of the decorative pattern. As a result, FIG.
Even when the covering member 248 is positioned so as to cover the front side of the light emitting section 250 as shown in (a) and (b), the light from the light emitting section 250 can be visually recognized through the transmitting section 248a. Even in this state, light decoration is possible. Further, the light transmitted through the transmissive portion 248a projects a decorative pattern in the shape of the transmissive portion 248a on the cover member 231. The cover member 2
Although 31 is made of a transparent member, by making it semitransparent so as to scatter a part of the transmitted light, it becomes easier to visually recognize the decorative pattern by the light transmitted through the transmission part 248a and enhance the decorative effect. You can

Further, the driving force is transmitted to the detection gear 252 for detecting that the covering member 248 is at the initial position via the ring gear 245. The detection gear 252 is provided with a light shielding plate 252a, and by detecting this light shielding plate 252a with the detection sensor 253, it is possible to detect that it is in the initial position.

The detection sensor 253 is an optical sensor in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined gap, and outputs an ON signal when the light receiving unit detects light from the light emitting unit.
When the covering member 248 is at the initial position, the light shielding plate 252a is located between the light receiving part and the light emitting part of the detection sensor 253 as shown in FIG. 59(a), and the output of the detection sensor 253 is turned off. Has been Further, as shown in FIG. 59(c), when the covering member 248 operates from the initial position, the light shielding plate 252a retracts from between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion of the detection sensor 253, and the output of the detection sensor 253 turns on. Therefore, it is possible to detect that the covering member 248 is in the initial position.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, it is possible to produce a game by operation in a gaming machine that produces a state advantageous to the player. A movable effect device (upper movable decoration unit 210) is provided, and the movable effect device can be converted into a light emitting unit 250, a covering state that covers the front of the light emitting unit 250, and a retracted state that is retracted from the front of the light emitting unit 250. The member 248 is provided, and the covering member 248 has a transmissive part 248a capable of transmitting light from the light emitting part 250. Even in the covered state, the light from the light emitting part 250 is visually recognized through the transmissive part 248a. It will be possible. Therefore, it is possible to always decorate with light, so that the decorative property is enhanced and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the covering member 248 has the light emitting unit 250 centered on an axis passing through the center of the light emitting unit 250.
By rotating the circumference of, the structure can be converted into the covered state and the retracted state. Therefore, in the covered state, decoration by the light from the light emitting section 250 that has passed through the transmission section 248a is performed, and in the retracted state, the decoration by the direct light from the light emitting section 250 is performed, and the decoration by the different light is performed. It will be possible. Further, it is possible to perform decoration such as a revolving light, which enables various effects and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the covering member 248 is decorated on the surface visible to the player in the covered state, and the transparent portion 248a is provided along the decoration. Therefore,
The decoration applied to the covering member 248 can be emphasized, the decorativeness can be improved, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

The covering member 248 may cover the entire circumference of the light emitting unit 250. Further, in this case, it is preferable to set the range of the transmitting portion 248a wider than that in the above-described embodiment. Further, the range of the transmissive portion 248a may be changed depending on the position in the circumferential direction so that the amount of light that can be visually recognized by rotation is different, and decoration by changing the amount of light may be possible.

As an effect of operating the covering member 248, at the time of a predetermined effect on the display device 41 (at a predetermined timing), it is conceivable to start rotation from the initial position shown in FIG. However, the covering member 248 may be rotated without the light emitting unit 250 emitting light. That is, the decoration by the operation of the covering member 248 and the decoration by the light emission of the light emitting section 250 can be executed independently, and a mode of performing each independently and a mode of performing both at the same time can be executed. As a result, a variety of decoration modes can be realized and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

For example, the appearance at the start of light emission differs between the case where the light emitting unit 250 emits light while the covering member 248 is rotated and the case where the cover member 248 starts rotating while the light emitting unit 250 emits light, resulting in different impressions. Can be given. In particular, if the light emitting section 250 is caused to emit light while the covering member 248 is rotated, the change in the light emitting mode visually recognized by the player will start earlier, and a more decorative effect will be produced.

Further, since the consciousness is usually directed to the effect display on the display device 41, it is difficult for the player to notice by rotating the covering member 248 without performing special notification and without causing the light emitting unit 250 to emit light. The production of can be executed. That is, it is possible to provide an effect that only the player who views the covering member 248 at a proper timing can know the operation of the covering member 248. For example, by performing such an effect as a notification that a special result will be obtained, it is possible to give a sensed player a sense of superiority and improve the enjoyment of the game. In addition, by giving a notice that the light emitting member 250 will emit light after such an effect, a notice at a previous stage of the notification (main notification) performed by the light emission of the light emitting unit 250 and the rotation of the covering member 248 ( It is possible to improve the interest of notification production.

<Product assembly production>
In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, before the operation of the first upper movable member 230 (that is, as a suggestive effect suggesting the execution of the notification (main notification) performed by the light emission of the light emitting unit 250 and the rotation of the covering member 248. Before execution of this notification), it is possible to execute the accessory assembly effect of displaying a moving image imitating the completion of the first upper movable member 230 from a plurality of parts.
It should be noted that the advance notice (previous notice) of the notice (main notice) performed by the light emission of the light emitting unit 250 and the rotation of the covering member 248 and the fall of the first upper movable member 230 (see FIG. 58A) are executed. As a suggestive effect that suggests, a role of displaying a moving image imitating the completion of the first upper movable member 230 from a plurality of parts before the operation of the first upper movable member 230 (that is, before the execution of the previous notification). It is also possible to configure to execute the object assembly effect.

As shown in FIG. 60, for example, the first upper movable member 230 includes an outer decoration member 233, an inner decoration member 232, a cover member 231, a light emitting unit 240, an upper cover member 255, a reflector lens 234, and a reflector. 235, a mounting member 239, a substrate lens 236,
The LED board 237, the board cover 238, and a plurality of screws (not shown).

63 to 64 show examples of the display on the display device 41 when the accessory assembly effect is executed.
For example, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the effect control device 300 creates a variable display effect of displaying the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game as the special figure variable display game is executed. Execute. Then, at a predetermined timing, the effect control device 300 starts the accessory assembly effect.
In the accessory assembly production, for example, as shown in FIG. 63(b), first, a component image imitating a component forming the first upper movable member 230 is displayed.

In the example shown here, of the component images simulating the components constituting the first upper movable member 230, the component image simulating the light emitting unit 240 and the component image simulating the upper cover member 255 have already been united. Further, the component image simulating the reflector lens 234 and the component image simulating the reflector 235 have already been combined, and the component image simulating the substrate lens 236, the component image simulating the LED substrate 237, and the component simulating the substrate cover 238. The images have already been merged. That is, since the accessory assembly effect is started from a state in which part of the component images are united, part of the process (that is, the process of combining the light emitting unit 240 and the upper cover member 255, the process of combining the reflector lens 234 and the reflector 235). Process, substrate lens 236, LED substrate 237 and substrate cover 2
The step of incorporating 38) will be omitted. In this way, the internal structure of the first upper movable member 230 is clarified by performing the accessory assembly production by assembling the first upper movable member 230 by omitting a part of the actual process. Therefore, the first upper movable member 2
It is possible to prevent cheating on 30. That is, if the internal structure of the first upper movable member 230 is clarified, there is a possibility of promoting illicit acts such as mischief on the first upper movable member 230. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the internal structure of the first upper movable member 230 is not clarified even when the accessory assembly effect is performed, the accessory assembly effect promotes a fraudulent act on the first upper movable member 230. Not a factor. In addition, the steps to omit in the accessory assembly production,
The process is not limited to these steps and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the example shown here, of the component images simulating the components forming the first upper movable member 230, the component images simulating the screws are omitted. In this way, by performing the accessory assembly effect of assembling the first upper movable member 230 from a plurality of parts in which some of the actual parts are omitted, the inside of the first upper movable member 230 is achieved even if the accessory assembly effect is performed. Since the structure is not clear, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the first upper movable member 230. It should be noted that the parts omitted in the accessory assembly production are not limited to the screws and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, although the inner decoration member 232 is actually screwed to the reflector 235, in the example shown here, the image of the part simulating the screw is omitted, so that the inner decoration member 232 becomes the outer decoration member 233. It can be made to appear as if it is sandwiched with the reflector 235. In this way, by performing some accessory assembly production by assembling the first upper movable member 230 by assembling some parts by an assembly method different from the actual one, even if the accessory assembly production is performed, the first upper movable member 230 is Since the internal structure is not clarified, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the first upper movable member 230. In addition, in the accessory assembly production, the assembly method different from the actual one is not limited to different methods such as clamping and screwing. For example, as shown in FIG. It may be that the parts to be assembled are different. In addition, the component (assembling component) to be assembled by an assembling method different from the actual one in the accessory assembly production is not limited to the inner decoration member 232, and can be appropriately changed.

In addition, in the accessory production, the probability setting value currently set is suggested by the display mode of at least one of the plurality of component images. In the example shown here, a part image imitating the light emitting unit 240 is decorated with imitating the transparent portion 248a,
In addition, the color of the part image is white.

FIG. 64(c) shows an example of a display mode corresponding to the currently set probability setting value. For example, as shown in FIG. 64(c), a transmissive part 248a is added to a component image simulating the light emitting unit 240.
In the example shown here, the probability setting value that is currently set is "setting 2" because it corresponds to "setting 2" when the color of the component image is white. Suggests that.
The display mode corresponding to the currently set probability setting value is not limited to that shown in FIG. 64(c).
It is also possible to suggest the currently set probability setting value by the display mode of the component image imitating the component other than the light emitting unit 240.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63C, for example, the light emitting unit 240 (the upper cover member 255
,), the reflector 235 (including the reflector lens 234), the mounting member 239, and the substrate lens 236 (including the LED substrate 237 and the substrate cover 238) are displayed as a moving image.
Next, for example, as shown in FIG. 64A, a moving image imitating the step of combining the inner decorative member 232 and the outer decorative member 233 is displayed. The interior decoration member 232 is actually a reflector 235.
However, here, the receiving side component (assembled component) is different from the actual one so that the internal structure of the first upper movable member 230 is not clarified even if the accessory assembly production is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64B, for example, the cover member 231 and the cover member 23
The first upper movable member 230 by combining the group of assembled parts (e.g., the light-emitting unit 240) located behind the 1 with the group of assembled parts (the outer decorative member 233 etc.) located in front of the cover member 231.
A video imitating the process of completing is displayed. As a result, an accessory image imitating the first upper movable member 230 is displayed.
After that, the effect control device 300 notifies (main notification) by light emission of the light emitting unit 250 and rotation of the covering member 248, or notification (main notification) by light emission of the light emitting unit 250 and rotation of the covering member 248. ) Advance notice (previous notification) or the first upper movable member 230 falls (
58(a)) is executed.

In the present embodiment, according to the display mode of the component image among the performance modes of the accessory assembly performance,
Although the probability setting value currently set is suggested, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of (or in addition to) the display mode of the component image, the probability setting value currently set by another mode may be suggested. It is possible.
For example, the probability setting value currently set may be suggested by the number of component images to be omitted, such that the smaller the number of component images to omit, the higher the probability setting value.
Further, for example, the probability setting value currently set may be suggested by a combination of colors and patterns of each component image.
Further, for example, a component image imitating a screw may be displayed, and the probability setting value currently set may be suggested by the rotation direction or rotation speed of the component image. At that time, it is also possible to display an effect image (for example, an image of a spark that appears to be generated by rotation) for emphasizing the rotation.

Further, for example, the probability setting value is higher as the number of processes appearing during the character assembly production is higher, and the probability setting value currently set is suggested by the number of processes appearing during the character assembly production. Is also good.
In addition, the display area of the display device 41 is divided into a plurality of small areas, and an accessory assembly effect of simultaneously performing a plurality of steps in one small area is executed, and each of the plurality of steps is separately performed in another small area. It can also be configured to do so.
Further, for example, if the probability set value is lower as the number of steps that do not satisfy the predetermined assembly order condition among the steps that appear during the accessory assembly production is lower, the assembly order of the first upper movable member 230 in the accessory assembly production. May indicate the currently set probability setting value.
Further, the higher the rotation speed of the covering member 248 is, the higher the probability setting value is. For example, it is currently set by the rotation speed of the covering member 248 in the completed image (that is, the accessory image simulating the first upper movable member 230). A probability setting value may be suggested. It is also possible to suggest the currently set probability setting value by the rotation direction of the covering member 248 in the completed image, the presence or absence of light emission of the light emitting unit 250 in the completed image, the emission color, and the like.

Further, in the present embodiment, some steps are omitted in order to prevent the internal structure of the first upper movable member 230 from being clarified, that is, in order to conceal the accurate internal structure of the first upper movable member 230. Although the accessory assembly production is performed in the production mode, the production mode in which some parts are omitted, and the production mode in which the assembling method is different, the accessory assembly production is performed in any one of these production modes. The accurate internal structure of the first upper movable member 230 can be concealed only by performing the above. Therefore, the accessory assembly effect may be performed in any one of these effect modes. Further, in addition to these effect modes (or in place of some or all of these effect modes), by performing the accessory assembly effect in other effect modes, the accurate interior of the first upper movable member 230 can be obtained. It is possible to hide the structure.
For example, the accessory assembly effect of assembling the first upper movable member 230 from a plurality of parts including parts different from actual parts may be executed. That is, as another effect mode, even when a different effect mode is used, the internal structure of the first upper movable member 230 can be prevented from being clarified.
Further, for example, an accessory assembly effect of assembling the first upper movable member 230 by adding extra parts may be executed. That is, as another effect mode, an effect mode in which extra parts are added may be performed.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the game (special figure variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and when the result of the game is the special result, the game value is given to the player. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state in which is given, a production device (first upper movable member 230) configured by a plurality of members (parts) and performing a predetermined operation to perform a game-related production, The production control means (production control device 300) capable of controlling the device, and the production control means, before the operation of the production device, a series of productions (books) imitating the completion of the production device by a plurality of members. In the case of the embodiment, it is possible to execute an assembly effect (feature object assembly effect) that displays a moving image, and it is possible to suggest predetermined information depending on the effect mode of the assembly effect.
Therefore, since a novel effect can be executed before the operation of the effect device (first upper movable member 230), the interest in the effect device can be increased.
The effect device is not limited to the first upper movable member 230, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the operating unit of the lower movable decorative unit 510 (the first decorative member 550 that can move in the vertical direction and the movable member that can move in the vertical direction). It may be the second decorative member 560).

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, a setting means capable of setting one probability set value among a plurality of probability set values to which the probability values used for the lottery of the game (special figure variation display game) are assigned ( The game control device 100) may be provided so that the probability setting value set by the setting means as the predetermined information can be suggested according to the production mode of the assembly production (
See FIG. 64(c).
With this configuration, the probability setting value can be suggested according to the production mode of the assembly production (characteristics assembly production), and thus a novel production can be executed before the operation of the production device (first upper movable member 230). It is possible to enhance the interest in the production device.
It should be noted that the predetermined information, that is, the information suggested by the production mode of the assembly production (characteristics assembly production) is not limited to the probability setting value, and can be changed as appropriate, for example, the expectation of a big hit or the reach occurrence. It may be the degree of expectation.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the assembly effect (feature object assembly effect) is the effect device (
The first upper movable member 230) is a series of effects in which component member images (component images) imitating members (components) are assembled in a predetermined order. By changing the display mode to a specific display mode (for example, a mode in which the decoration is "extraordinary heat"), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the game result will be a special result as the predetermined information.
With such a configuration, the degree of expectation of a big hit can be suggested according to the production mode of the assembly production (characteristics assembly production), and thus a novel production is executed before the operation of the production device (first upper movable member 230). It is possible to enhance the interest in the production device.
It should be noted that the predetermined information, that is, the information suggested by the production mode of the assembly production (feature product assembly production) is not limited to the expectation degree of being a big hit, and can be changed as appropriate, for example, probability setting values and reach occurrence. It may be the degree of expectation.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the assembly effect (feature object assembly effect) is the effect device (
It is a series of effects for synthesizing component member images (component images) simulating the members (components) configuring the first upper movable member 230) in a predetermined order, and displays a part of the component member images in the assembly effect. By changing to a specific display mode (for example, a mode with the decoration of "intense heat"),
The predetermined information can be configured to indicate the degree of expectation that the game result will be a special result.
With such a configuration, the degree of expectation of a big hit can be suggested according to the production mode of the assembly production (characteristics assembly production), and thus a novel production is executed before the operation of the production device (first upper movable member 230). It is possible to enhance the interest in the production device.
It should be noted that the predetermined information, that is, the information suggested by the production mode of the assembly production (feature product assembly production) is not limited to the expectation degree of being a big hit, and can be changed as appropriate, for example, probability setting values and reach occurrence. It may be the degree of expectation.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the assembly production (characteristics assembly production), some parts are assembled by an assembly method different from the actual assembly method to assemble the production device (first upper movable member 230). Can be configured.
With this configuration, since the internal structure of the rendering device (first upper movable member 230) is not clarified even when the assembly rendering (characteristics assembly rendering) is performed, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the rendering device. Becomes

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the assembly effect (feature object assembly effect), the effect device (first upper movable member 230) is assembled from a plurality of parts including parts that are different from actual parts. You can
With this configuration, since the internal structure of the rendering device (first upper movable member 230) is not clarified even when the assembly rendering (characteristics assembly rendering) is performed, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the rendering device. Becomes

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, part of the actual process may be omitted in the assembly effect (characteristics assembly effect), and the effect device (first upper movable member 230) may be configured. it can.
With this configuration, since the internal structure of the rendering device (first upper movable member 230) is not clarified even when the assembly rendering (characteristics assembly rendering) is performed, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the rendering device. Becomes

Further, in the game machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the assembly effect (characteristics assembly effect), the effect device (first upper movable member 230) is assembled from a plurality of parts in which some of the actual parts are omitted. can do.
With this configuration, since the internal structure of the rendering device (first upper movable member 230) is not clarified even when the assembly rendering (characteristics assembly rendering) is performed, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the rendering device. Becomes

In addition, in the accessory assembly production, among the components forming the first upper movable member 230, those which are difficult for the player to understand and those which cannot be visually recognized (or are difficult to visually recognize) may be put together into virtual components. At that time, the probability setting value and the jackpot expectation degree may be suggested in accordance with the display mode of the virtual parts.
Further, the part image that imitates the part that constitutes the first upper movable member 230 does not have to be an image that actually reproduces the actual part, but may be an image that deforms the actual part.
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the accessory pattern assembling effect of the completed pattern in which the first upper movable member 230 is completely assembled is illustrated, but even if there is an incomplete pattern of assembly effect in which the first upper movable member 230 is not assembled properly. good.
It is also possible to display a notification image for notifying the remaining length of the execution time of the accessory assembly effect. At that time, an integrated image in which one component image and an informing image for informing the remaining length of the execution time of the accessory assembly effect are integrated may be displayed.

Also, in the accessory assembly production, some parts are omitted, extra parts are added,
When the display mode of the part image is the setting suggestion mode, the virtual part is displayed, the display mode of the virtual part is the expectation degree suggestion mode, etc., the player may miss it. It is also possible to notify that the display is different depending on the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 and the sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b.
In addition, in the character assembly production, not only the character images are gradually completed from one direction, but also the character images are assembled from another direction at a predetermined timing.

Moreover, you may comprise so that the 1st upper movable member 230 may fall to the front of the display area which displays an accessory assembly production. Specifically, for example, the position shown in FIG.
When it is the maximum drop position of 30, the accessory assembly effect is performed in the central portion of the display area of the display device 41, and then the first upper movable member 230 is moved to the front of the central portion (the front portion and the rear portion overlap with the central portion). To the position, that is, to the maximum drop position, and the accessory assembly effect is performed at the upper part of the display area of the display device 41, and then the first upper movable member 230 is moved to the front of the upper part (to the front and back of the upper part). The pattern of dropping (to the overlapping position) may be made executable. As a result, it is possible to suggest the falling position of the first upper movable member 230, and to display another effect in the margin of the display area (display area in which the accessory assembly effect is not performed) during execution of the accessory assembly effect. Since it can be executed, the display space can be effectively used.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use the game balls. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, but includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines that use game balls. Further, the configurations of the above-described embodiments and modified examples can be appropriately combined and applied.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

10 gaming machine 25 production button (production operation means)
41 display device 100 game control device (setting means)
230 First upper movable member (production device)
300 production control device (execution means, production control means)
G1 promotion image G11 button image (operation means image)
G12 Notification image (effective period notification image)
G13 instruction image (operation mode instruction image)
Y Concealment image Z Decorative special design (design)
Z1 number image (identification image)
Z2 character image

Claims (4)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is given to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
Production operation means that can be operated by the player and is composed of a plurality of members,
And a production control means for controlling the production of the game,
The effect control means can execute a promotion effect that promotes the operation of the effect operation means,
The promotion production is
An assembly effect that displays a series of effects imitating the completion of the effect operation means by the plurality of members before the operation effective period of the effect operation means,
During the operation effective period of the effect operation means, it is possible to display an promotion image including an operation means image that is displayed as a result of the assembly effect and imitates the effect operation means, and accept an operation to the effect operation means. It consists of a notification effect to notify that,
A game machine characterized in that predetermined information can be suggested according to the production mode of the assembly production. Providing setting means capable of setting one probability setting value from a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values used in the lottery of the game are assigned,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the probability setting value set by the setting unit as the predetermined information can be suggested by the production mode of the assembly production. The assembly effect is a series of effects in which constituent member images simulating the members that form the effect operation means are assembled in a predetermined order,
By changing the display mode of a part of the component member images in the assembly effect to a specific display mode, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the result of the game will be the special result as the predetermined information. The gaming machine according to claim 1. The assembly effect is a series of effects in which constituent member images simulating the members forming the effect operation means are combined in a predetermined order,
By changing the display mode of a part of the component member images in the assembly effect to a specific display mode, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the result of the game will be the special result as the predetermined information. The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images